994-0140
GE
Grid Solutions
D20MX
Substation Controller
Instruction Manual
994-0140
Version 1.5x Revision 4
GE Information
GE Grid Solutions
Copyright Notice
© 2012 - 2016, General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
The information contained in this online publication is the exclusive property of General Electric Company,
except as otherwise indicated. You may view, copy and print documents and graphics incorporated in this online
publication (the “Documents”) subject to the following: (1) the Documents may be used solely for personal, informational, non-commercial purposes; (2) the Documents may not be modified or altered in any way; and (3) General Electric Company withholds permission for making the Documents or any portion thereof accessible via the
internet. Except as expressly provided herein, you may not use, copy, print, display, reproduce, publish, license,
post, transmit or distribute the Documents in whole or in part without the prior written permission of General
Electric Company.
The information contained in this online publication is proprietary and subject to change without notice. The
software described in this online publication is supplied under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Trademark Notices
GE and
are trademarks and service marks of General Electric Company.
* Trademarks of General Electric Company.
ERNI is a registered trademark of ERNI Elektroapparate GMBH. Hyperterminal is a registered trademark of Hilgraeve, Tera Term is a registered trademark of T. Teranishi, Incorporated. IEC is a registered trademark of Commission Electrotechnique Internationale. IEEE is a registered trademark of the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers, Inc. Internet Explorer, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. JAVA and J2SE are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Maxell is a registered trademark of
Hitachi Maxell, Ltd. MiniSQL is a trademark of Hughes Technologies. Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Automation Inc. Panduit is a registered trademark of Panduit Corp. Saft is a registered trademark of SAFT
société anonyme. SEL is a registered trademark of Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. Silicon Systems is a
registered trademark of Silicon Systems, Inc. Sonnenschein is a registered trademark of Deutsche Exide GMBH.
Tadiran is a registered trademark of Tadiran Israel Electronics Industries Ltd. Toshiba is a registered trademark of
Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba, doing business as Toshiba Corporation. VESA is registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association Corporation. Privileged Identity Manager is a trademark of CyberArk Software Ltd.
Other company or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
Security Notice
D20MX V1.5x is Achilles Level I certified. The Achilles Certified mark is used under license from Wurldtech Security Technologies Inc.
This printed manual is recyclable.
Please return for recycling where facilities exist.
D20MX Substation Controller
Table of contents
PRODUCT SUPPORT
Access the GE Grid Solutions Web site.......................................................................9
Search GE Grid Solutions technical support library.................................................9
Contact GE Grid Solutions technical support ...........................................................9
Product returns.............................................................................................................10
Upgrade your D20MX processor firmware ..............................................................10
ABOUT THIS
DOCUMENT
Purpose ..........................................................................................................................11
Intended audience ......................................................................................................11
Additional documentation .........................................................................................11
How to use this manual ..............................................................................................12
Document conventions ...............................................................................................12
Safety words and definitions......................................................................................13
BEFORE YOU START
Safety precautions ......................................................................................................15
Warning symbols ......................................................................................................................................... 16
Product overview..........................................................................................................17
Product design................................................................................................................................................ 17
Assembling a D20 ......................................................................................................................................... 17
Other components........................................................................................................................................ 17
Redundant system configuration.......................................................................................................... 17
D20 device .....................................................................................................................18
D20MX processor ......................................................................................................................................... 18
D20 chassis ...................................................................................................................................................... 23
D20 power supply ......................................................................................................................................... 26
Modems ............................................................................................................................................................. 27
Serial ports........................................................................................................................................................ 28
WESTERM D20M+ termination panel ................................................................................................... 30
Ordering guides ............................................................................................................32
D20 - D20MX substation controller ordering guide ...................................................................... 34
D20MX upgrade kits..................................................................................................................................... 35
Specifications ................................................................................................................36
Storage recommendations.........................................................................................38
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Storage conditions .......................................................................................................................................38
INSTALLING THE D20
SUBSTATION
CONTROLLER
Required tools and materials.....................................................................................39
Installation procedure - D20 Substation Controller ..............................................40
Rack installation ...........................................................................................................40
D20 chassis layouts .....................................................................................................41
RETROFITTING THE
D20MX IN AN
EXISTING D20
CHASSIS
Required tools and materials.....................................................................................43
Retrofit procedure - D20MX processor into a D20 .................................................44
Unpacking and inspecting the D20MX......................................................................52
D20 chassis layouts .....................................................................................................52
Connecting the power supply to a D20MX...............................................................53
Grounding the D20MX .................................................................................................54
CONNECTING TO
DEVICES AND
NETWORKS
Cabling overview ..........................................................................................................55
D20MX front panel connectors ...............................................................................................................55
General cabling requirements .................................................................................................................57
Serial ...............................................................................................................................57
D.20 Link.........................................................................................................................57
Second D.20 link .............................................................................................................................................58
D.20 communications interface..............................................................................................................58
D.20 splitter.......................................................................................................................................................58
D.20 RS-485 interface ..................................................................................................................................58
GFO and PFO adaptors................................................................................................................................58
Extended power..............................................................................................................................................58
D.20 DC interface ...........................................................................................................................................58
Interposing relays ..........................................................................................................................................58
Universal Protocol Converter ...................................................................................................................59
Peripherals ........................................................................................................................................................59
Twisted-pair Ethernet (for 526-3001 only) ...............................................................60
Fiber optic Ethernet (for 526-3003 and 526-3005LF only).....................................61
LAN redundancy ...........................................................................................................62
IP addresses ..................................................................................................................63
RS-232.............................................................................................................................65
D20 Gateway system redundancy ............................................................................66
Failover sequence..........................................................................................................................................67
Required components .................................................................................................................................68
RS-232 switch panel operation ...............................................................................................................69
Redundancy wiring diagrams..................................................................................................................69
POWERING-UP AND
TESTING A D20
SUBSTATION
CONTROLLER
Required for testing .....................................................................................................71
Accessing WESMAINT II+ using a terminal.........................................................................................72
Terminal Emulation.......................................................................................................................................72
SHELL...................................................................................................................................................................72
Power up and test steps..............................................................................................72
Set up a PC to act as a WESMAINTII+ terminal .......................................................73
Power up the D20MX....................................................................................................73
Automatic on-line start-up test.................................................................................73
Code and configuration files ....................................................................................................................74
4
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Further testing ................................................................................................................................................ 74
Test for redundancy.....................................................................................................74
Check that fail-over is functioning correctly ..........................................................75
Check that switch-over is functioning correctly ....................................................75
Verify either hardware or software switch-over....................................................76
CONFIGURING THE
SOFTWARE
Introduction to the D20MX software ........................................................................77
Technical Support shell access..................................................................................78
D20MX user accounts ..................................................................................................78
Remote and local user accounts ........................................................................................................... 78
Factory default user account ................................................................................................................. 79
System default user account................................................................................................................... 79
Download image files to the D20MX.........................................................................79
When to download ....................................................................................................................................... 79
Prerequisites for image download ........................................................................................................ 80
Download software over a serial connection.................................................................................. 80
Download image files over a network connection........................................................................ 82
Firmware integrity......................................................................................................................................... 84
Committing new firmware........................................................................................................................ 84
Reverting to old firmware.......................................................................................................................... 85
Download hardware support package to the D20MX ...........................................85
When to download ....................................................................................................................................... 85
Prerequisites for HSP download............................................................................................................. 86
Prerequisites for HSP download over a network link ................................................................... 86
Download HSP over a serial connection ............................................................................................ 86
Download HSP over a network connection ...................................................................................... 86
Stage HSP File for SGConfig ..................................................................................................................... 87
Stage HSP file for serial transfer............................................................................................................. 88
Transfer HSP file to the D20MX over a serial link ........................................................................... 89
Transfer HSP over a network connection .......................................................................................... 90
Apply HSP.......................................................................................................................................................... 91
Transfer D20/D200 configurations to the D20MX .................................................93
Transfer existing D20 or D200 configurations to the D20MX................................................... 93
Transferring a D200 configuration containing network applications on node 2+ ......... 99
Updating a D20 configuration to use the D20MX firmware definition with ConfigPro .....
100
Updating a D200 configuration to use the D20MX firmware definition with ConfigPro ..
104
Software (feature) licensing .................................................................................... 105
Configuring Serial Expansion Cards ...................................................................... 107
USING THE D20MX
SUBSTATION
CONTROLLER
D20MX processor front panel LEDs ....................................................................... 109
Operational status LEDs.......................................................................................................................... 109
LAN port status LEDs ................................................................................................................................ 110
Fiber optic port status LED .................................................................................................................... 110
D20 power supply LEDs............................................................................................ 110
I/O peripheral LEDs................................................................................................... 111
SERVICING THE
D20MX SUBSTATION
CONTROLLER
Performing periodic inspection ............................................................................. 113
Performing maintenance......................................................................................... 113
Removing the D20MX processor module ............................................................. 114
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 115
Replacing D20 fuses ..................................................................................................................................115
GENERATING A
SYSTEM DEFAULT
CONFIGURATION
FOR THE D20MX
Prerequisites .............................................................................................................. 117
Generate a system default configuration for the D20MX.................................. 117
REMOVING
CONFIGURATION
DATA AND
SENSITIVE
INFORMATION
FROM THE D20MX
Remove configuration data and sensitive information from the D20MX ....... 119
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting serial communications .............................................................. 123
Prerequisites..................................................................................................................................................119
Removal Procedure....................................................................................................................................119
Removing configuration data on a PC................................................................... 121
Serial analyzer ..............................................................................................................................................123
Prerequisites..................................................................................................................................................124
Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................124
Advanced Analyzer Options...................................................................................................................126
Buffer Overflow............................................................................................................................................126
Troubleshooting firmware version mismatches ................................................. 127
D20MX Shell commands........................................................................................... 127
Changing the baud rate...........................................................................................................................127
SET BAUD RATE command .....................................................................................................................128
Supported data speeds............................................................................................................................128
D20MX logging ........................................................................................................... 129
WESMAINT error log...................................................................................................................................129
Kernel error log ............................................................................................................................................129
DEFAULT ROLEBASED ACCESS
CONTROL MODEL
Configured roles in the D20MX ............................................................................... 131
STANDARDS &
PROTECTION
Compliance standards ............................................................................................. 143
FREQUENTLY ASKED
QUESTIONS
Questions and answers............................................................................................ 146
USING CONFIGPRO
WITH D20MX
Transferring D20 configurations to the D20MX................................................... 152
Configuration file in project directory................................................................................................164
Downloading a D20MX configuration.................................................................... 165
Local [serial] transfer of configuration .............................................................................................165
6
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Remote [secure] transfer of configuration..................................................................................... 171
Application definition files and default configurations...................................... 174
Staging factory default configuration files..................................................................................... 174
Installing application definitions: archived..................................................................................... 175
Installing application definitions: non-archived........................................................................... 178
SECURE
CONNECTION FOR
LOGICLINX
Secure connection with SGConfig v8.1 or higher ................................................ 183
Secure connection with ConfigPro......................................................................... 184
WESMAINT user configuration................................................................................ 184
LogicLinx (B082-0N) configuration ......................................................................... 186
PuTTY configuration.................................................................................................. 187
LogicLinx Editor configuration................................................................................ 191
D20 SPARE CROSSREFERENCE
Smart catalog numbers ........................................................................................... 193
D20 spare parts modules, spare cross-reference............................................... 194
Processors ..................................................................................................................................................... 194
Modems .......................................................................................................................................................... 194
Termination................................................................................................................................................... 194
Power supply ................................................................................................................................................ 195
Chassis ............................................................................................................................................................ 195
D20A analog input modules, spare cross-reference .......................................... 196
D20A WESTERM modules ...................................................................................................................... 196
D20A WESDAC modules.......................................................................................................................... 196
DNP3A WESDAC modules ...................................................................................................................... 197
D20A adapter modules............................................................................................................................ 197
D20C combination modules, spare cross-reference .......................................... 198
D20C WESTERM Modules........................................................................................................................ 198
D20C WESDAC modules.......................................................................................................................... 198
DNP3C WESDAC modules ...................................................................................................................... 199
D20C digital input adapter modules ................................................................................................. 199
D20C first slot of analog adapter modules .................................................................................... 199
D20C second slot of analog adapter modules............................................................................. 200
D20C output adapters ............................................................................................................................. 200
D20C WESDAC daughter cards ........................................................................................................... 200
D20K control modules, spare cross-reference .................................................... 201
D20K WESTERM modules ....................................................................................................................... 201
D20K WESDAC modules.......................................................................................................................... 201
DNP3K WESDAC modules....................................................................................................................... 202
D20S status modules, spare cross-reference ...................................................... 202
D20S WESTERM modules........................................................................................................................ 202
D20S WESDAC modules .......................................................................................................................... 203
DNP3S WESDAC modules....................................................................................................................... 203
D20S RNET adapter pack........................................................................................................................ 204
PRODUCT
COMBINATIONS
Module compatibility ................................................................................................ 205
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WESMAINT ERROR
LOG MESSAGES
LIST OF ACRONYMS
Acronym Definitions ................................................................................................. 213
MISCELLANEOUS
Warranty..................................................................................................................... 217
Revision history ......................................................................................................... 217
8
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Product Support
Product Support
If you need help with any aspect of your GE Grid Solutions product, you can:
•
Access the GE Grid Solutions Web site
•
Search the GE Technical Support library
•
Contact Technical Support
Access the GE Grid Solutions Web site
The GE Grid Solutions Web site provides fast access to technical information, such as
manuals, release notes and knowledge base topics.
Visit us on the Web at: http://www.gegridsolutions.com
Search GE Grid Solutions technical support library
This site serves as a document repository for post-sales requests. To get access to the
Technical Support Web site, go to:
http://supportcentral.ge.com/*SASTechSupport
or
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/TDSASSupport
Contact GE Grid Solutions technical support
GE Grid Solutions Technical Support is open 24 hours a day, seven days a week for you to
talk directly to a GE representative.
In the U.S. and Canada, call toll-free: 1 800-547-8629
International customers, please call: + 1 905-927-7070
Or e-mail to multilin.tech@ge.com
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
9
PRODUCT SUPPORT
Have the following information ready to give to Technical Support:
•
Ship to address (the address that the product is to be returned to)
•
Bill to address (the address that the invoice is to be sent to)
•
Contact name
•
Contact phone number
•
Contact fax number
•
Contact e-mail address
•
Product number / serial number
•
Description of problem
Technical Support provides you with a case number for your reference.
Product returns
A Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number must accompany all equipment being
returned for repair, servicing, or for any other reason. Before you return a product, please
contact GE Grid Solutions to obtain an RMA number and instructions for return shipments.
You are sent the RMA number and RMA documents via fax or e-mail. Once you receive the
RMA documents, attach them to the outside of the shipping package and ship to GE Grid
Solutions.
Product returns are not accepted unless accompanied by the Return Merchandise
Authorization number.
NOTE
Upgrade your D20MX processor firmware
The firmware of your D20MX Substation Controller can be upgraded to provide the latest
functionality and improvements.
Go to the D20MX Substation Controller web page at http://www.gegridsolutions.com/app/
ViewFiles.aspx?prod=d20mx&type=7 to download the upgrade software.
10
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
About this Document
About this Document
Purpose
This manual provides information about installing, setting up, using and maintaining your
D20MXTM Processor. This manual does not provide any procedures for configuring the
software of the D20MX.
Intended audience
This manual is intended for use by field technicians and maintenance personnel who are
responsible for the installation, upgrade, wiring and maintenance of SCADA equipment.
This manual assumes that the user is experienced in:
•
Electrical utility applications
•
Electrical wiring and safety procedures
•
Related other manufacturers’ products, such as protective relays and
communications equipment
Additional documentation
For the most current version of the D20MX Instruction Manual, please download a copy
from: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/app/ViewFiles.aspx?prod=d20mx&type=3
For further information about the D20MX, refer to the following documents.
•
SGConfigTM Online Help
•
D20/D200 Installation and Operation Guide, 994-0078
•
Application Configuration Guides and User Guides, available on the D20MX
Documentation CD (GE part number 588-0075) or extracted zip file.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
11
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
How to use this manual
This manual describes how to install the D20MX and get it up and running for the first time.
Procedures are provided for all component options available for the D20MX. The
components included in your D20MX depend on what was ordered for your substation
application.
The software-related procedures in this manual are based on using a computer running
Windows® 7. Some steps and dialog boxes may vary slightly if you are using another
version of Windows.
Document conventions
The following typographic conventions are used throughout this manual:
Bold face is used for:
•
Names of software program menus, editors, and dialog boxes; also for the names of
menu commands, keyboard keys, icons and desktop shortcuts, and buttons and fields
in editors and dialog boxes
•
Names of hardware components
•
User input that must be typed exactly
Italic face is used for:
12
•
Emphasis
•
Cross-references to sections, figures and tables within this manual and for titles of
other documents
•
File and directory names; examples of directory paths are generally given in the
Windows format
•
Placeholders for user input that is specific to the user. May also include angle brackets
around the placeholder if the placeholder is already in italic text. For example,
c:\<product>\product.def
•
References to a parameter or field value shown
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
Safety words and definitions
Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document
to help prevent injury, equipment damage or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document:
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, results in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates practices that are not related to personal injury.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
13
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
14
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 1: Before You Start
Before You Start
The D20MX Substation Gateway is a specialized computing platform which executes
communications and energy management applications for monitoring and control of
electrical substations. The D20MX is capable of consolidating data from multiple slave
devices connected through communication channels (DCA: Data Collection Applications)
and D20 Input / Output Modules in a single database. The D20MX can execute local logic,
aggregate data, process data through one of multiple applications (DTA: Data Translation
Applications) and report data upstream to master stations through different server
protocols (DPA: Data Processing Applications).
The new D20MX processor card is a pin-for-pin compatible replacement for all generations
of the D20 SBC, providing the latest revisions of common D20 applications and
performance enhancements to support NERC-compliant Cyber security.
Before you begin installing and using the D20MX, review the information in this chapter,
including the following topics:
•
Safety precautions
•
Regulatory compliance information
•
Product overview
•
Product specifications
•
Storage recommendations
Read and thoroughly understand this manual before installing and operating the unit.
Save these instructions for later use and reference.
WARNING! Failure to observe the instructions in this manual may result in death or
serious injury.
Safety precautions
Follow all safety precautions and instructions in this manual.
•
Only qualified personnel should work on the D20MX. Maintenance personnel should
be familiar with the technology and the hazards associated with electrical equipment.
•
Never work alone.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
15
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
•
Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this equipment, isolate
or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources of electric power. Assume that all
circuits are live until they have been completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay
particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources of power,
including the possibility of back feed.
•
Turn off all power supplying the equipment in which the D20MX is to be installed
before installing and wiring the D20MX.
•
Operate only from the power source specified on the installed power supply module.
•
Beware of potential hazards and wear personal protective equipment.
•
The successful operation of this equipment depends upon proper handling,
installation, and operation. Neglecting fundamental installation requirements may
lead to personal injury as well as damage to electrical equipment or other property.
•
All AC voltage terminals are protected from accidental contact by a mechanical safety
shield.
•
All electronic components within the D20MX are susceptible to damage from
electrostatic discharge. To prevent damage when handling this product use approved
static control procedures.
•
Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death. To prevent exposure to
hazardous voltages, disconnect and lock out all power sources before servicing and
removing components.
•
If the D20MX is used in a manner not specified in this manual, the protection provided
by the equipment may be impaired.
•
Changes or modifications made to the unit not authorized by GE Grid Solutions could
void the warranty.
Warning symbols
Table 1 explains the meaning of warning symbols that may appear on the D20MX.
Table 1: Warning symbols
Symbol
Description
The relevant circuit is direct current.
The relevant circuit is alternating current.
!
Caution: Refer to the documentation for important operation and
maintenance instructions. Failure to take or avoid specified actions could
result in loss of data or physical damage.
Warning: Dangerous voltage constituting risk of electric shock is present
within the unit. Failure to take or avoid specified actions could result in
physical harm to the user.
Earth/Ground Terminal
Protective Ground Terminal
Caution: Hot Surface
16
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
Product overview
The D20 is a standalone remote terminal unit (RTU). It consists of a D20MX processor
board, power supply, optional termination panels, and optional communications
equipment in a 3U tall, 19-inch wide chassis. These components, combined with software
applications running on the D20MX, form the D20 RTU System.
The D20 acts as a data concentrator and central processor. Field data gathered through
the peripheral modules and external Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) are stored in the
system database and can be accessed by the application programs loaded on the D20.
Product design
The D20 design has horizontally mounted processor boards, with multiple boards in some
versions.
The D20 is available in a Kit form, for self-assembly, and as factory-assembled RTUs.
Peripheral I/O boards operate independently of the main chassis and D20MX processor
board. This means that you can:
•
Use a D20 without direct connection to peripheral boards so that it acts as a master
data concentrator to other RTUs.
•
Hot-swap the peripherals without powering down the main processor. For information
on peripheral modules, see the D20/D200 Installation and Operations Guide (part
number 994-0078); see section: Connections and Configuration.
Assembling a D20
Many add-on options are available for the D20 devices, to provide different operational
performance and functions. Typically, the D20 devices consist of a Main Chassis with
required Peripheral I/O boards.
Other components
To complete a basic D20 device, several other components are required:
•
Peripheral I/O modules
•
D.20 Link for communication between the main board and the peripherals
•
Interposing Relay Panels, the need for which depends upon the load characteristics of
the device that is controlled by the D20K or D20C control peripherals. If this rating
exceeds the contact rating of the D20K or D20C control peripheral boards, then an
Interposing Relay Panel is required. See “Interposing relays” on page 58.
When using bit-based synchronous protocols a Universal Protocol Converter (UPC) board is
required to convert from byte to bit and back. The D20 communicates asynchronously
over its serial ports.
The jumper settings on the UPC are protocol-specific. See “Universal Protocol Converter”
on page 59.
NOTE
Redundant system configuration
If you are building a redundant system, you need additional cables to link the active and
standby units. See “D20 Gateway system redundancy” on page 66.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
17
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
D20 device
This section covers the:
•
D20MX processor
•
D20 chassis on page 23
•
D20 power supply on page 26
•
Modems on page 27
•
Serial ports on page 28
•
WESTERM D20M+ termination panel on page 30
D20MX processor
The D20MX is a single board computer built around a 667 MHz embedded PowerQUICC II
Pro processor. The D20MX supports open standard cyber security features that allow
interoperability in NERC CIP environments and introduces compliance to IEC standards;
refer to Appendix A, Standards & Protection for the complete listing.
18
Security
The D20MX provides the following new security improvements over its predecessors:
• Centralized user authentication and authorization (RADIUS), including integration with
Microsoft Servers using NPS
• Role Based Access Control (RBAC) keeping operator and engineering activities
separated, logged and simple
• NERC compliant passwords, with strong complexity rules and one-way encrypted
• Full auditing including Syslog integration to enterprise systems
• SFTP for secure network-based firmware upgrades and configuration file transfers
• SSH for secure network access to WESMAINT II+. and the LogicLinx Executor. Refer to
Appendix E: “Secure Connection for LogicLinx” on page 183 for details on securing
network access to the LogicLinx Executor.
• D20MX V1.5x is Achilles Level I certified.
To take advantage of these improvements, refer to the WESMAINT II+ for the D20MX
Configuration Guide (B014-1NCG) for details of these security features of the D20MX.
CyberArk
A plug-in available from CyberArk Software Ltd. enables the D20MX to be integrated with
the CyberArk Privileged Identity Management (PIM) Suite. In addition to centralized user
authentication and authorization, integration with CyberArk, PIM provides a one-time
password model for the D20MX.
Contact CyberArk (http://cyberark.com) for details.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
D20MX applications
Table 2 lists the applications included in the D20MX firmware.
* An Application ID containing an “N” (e.g., A009N) signifies a unique application definition
for the D20MX.
NOTE
† The D20MX version of the application is based on this D20 classic application version.
However, the D20MX version is not identical to the D20 classic version due to minor
changes to improve the robustness and security of the original application.
‡ The version of B009 in SAN0002 is actually based on D20 classic application version 401
but modified to be compatible with the version 310 application definition version.
Ф The version of B021 in SAN002 is actually based on D20 classic application version 991
but modified to be compatible with the version 912 application definition version.
Table 2: D20MX applications
License D20MX
Base D20 Classic
Application Name
Group Application ID Application Version †
Description
Common Application Definitions
001
A009N
805
PG&E DPA for D20MX
Pacific Gas and Electric (PG&E) data-processing
application (DPA) for remote terminal units
(RTUs).
001
A017N
131
Distributed Network
Protocol V1.00 DCA for
D20MX
Distributed Network
Protocol (DNP) V1.0 Data Link Application.
Required by the Quantum Meter Scanner DCA.
001
A018
120
Quantum Meter Scanner
DCA
The Quantum Meter Scanner DCA obtains data
from one or more Quantum Meters via the DNP
interface.
001
A023N
423
CDC Type I DPA for D20MX The CDC Type I DPA emulates a CDC Type I RTU
A026-1
322
Communication
Watchdog DTA
A027N
832
SOE Logger DTA for D20MX The Sequence-of-Events Logger DTA processes
sequence of events (SOEs) from any sub-set of
the system digital input and/or analog input
points.
A030
300
Accumulator Freeze DTA
Detects system status point changes and
system accumulator point freezes.
A033-5N
211
TEJAS V DPA for D20MX
Emulates a remote terminal unit utilizing the
(Valmet/Metso/Telvent) TEJAS V
communication protocol.
A035
211
Analog Reference DTA
Monitors analog input points and provides the
system database with pseudo analog values
that represent either correctly functioning
analog input hardware (good reference value),
or failed analog input hardware (bad reference
value).
001
A036N
421
ProLogic Executor DTA for Provides user programmable soft logic
D20MX
automation functionality.
001
A041-1
116
Proportional Integral
Derivative Control DTA
The Proportional, Integral and Derivative (PID)
DTA uses the generally-accepted industry
standard for control of closed loop processes.
A048
210
Status Combination DTA
Provides one ore more DI points, each of which
provides an event-driven logical OR of a set of
mapped system DI points.
A059-0N
911
Modbus DCA for D20MX
Acts as a data concentrator for one or more
Sub-Remote Units (SRUs) using the MODBUS
communication protocol (RTU & ASCII modes).
A064N
110
Tap Position Indication
DTA
Translates a digital input point from a range of
status points into an analog input value.
001
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Reports on the state of communications
between the RTU and a remote device (Data
Translation Application).
GE INFORMATION
19
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
License D20MX
Base D20 Classic
Application Name
Group Application ID Application Version †
001
001
20
Description
A065N
202
CL&P DTA
The China Light and Power DTA performs
miscellaneous functions as follows: Julian day/
year download, Raise/lower operations, RTS
time synchronization.
A074N
120
PML 3710 DCA
Enables the D20MX to communicate with PML
3710 ACM power meters.
A068N
311
Modbus DPA
Capable of communicating with one or more
master stations using the MODBUS protocol
(RTU & ASCII modes).
A078N
610
SEL Gateway DCA for
D20MX
A sub-master within a SCADA system,
controlling SEL relay equipment using SEL's
ASCII character-based relay protocol
A083-0
342
Calculator DTA
Convenient and flexible soft logic utility that
can perform applications such as substation
level interlocking, feeder interlocking, and
converting digital inputs to control outputs for
driving a map board
A088-0
203
Substation Maintenance
DTA
Allows status and analog input values to be
suppressed for maintenance purposes.
A098-0N
701
Courier DCA
Enables communication with Courier SRUs
(predominantly GEC K-Bus protection relays).
A101-0N
906
IEC 870-5-101 DPA for
D20MX
Communicate with one or more hosts using the
IEC 60870-5-101/104 (T101) protocol. Has the
ability to function as several distinct IEC 608705-101/104 RTUs. Supports the unbalanced
version of the data link.
A104-0N
124
Alarm Grouping DTA for
the D20MX
Provides DI points each representing a group
alarm. The group alarm is generated when the
number of DI points in the alarm state exceed
the group threshold value.
A113N
301
PSR DCA for D20MX
Programmable Synchrocheck Relay (PSR) DCA
acts as a data concentrator for several remote
PSRs. The DCA and remote PSRs function as a
remote synchronous closure controller.
A118
103
Failover DTA
Allows configurable combination of control
requests to result in a failover or switchover of
a redundant system.
A121-0
200
Automatic Frequency
Selection DTA
Provides AI points each derived from an
Automatic Selection Method (ASM). An ASM
selects the highest priority valid frequency
measurement from a group of AI points.
A123-0
111
NGC General DTA
Generates control lockout indications, digital
input suppression or unsupression indications,
and control active indications.
A131-0
132
MODBUS TCP/IP DCA
Provides an interface to Sub-Remote Units
(SRUs) using the MODBUS protocol over the
TCP/IP communication layer.
A135-0
110
MODBUS TCP/IP DPA
Provides communications with one or more
master station using the MODBUS protocol
over TCP/IP communication layer.
A161-0
302
Secondary Master Trip/
Close DTA
Translates control requests into conventional
trip/close operations in conjunction with
secondary control operations to be used as a
Secondary Master Trip or Close.
A162-0
146
Internet Statistics Display
Utilizes the WESMAINT II+ application menu in
order to display DNP/Internet protocol and IEC
60870-5-104 statistics.
A184-0
120
General Alarm DTA
Takes several alarms and groups them
together under one General Alarm.
A185-0N
303
W18979 DPA for D20MX
Emulates the Landis & Gyr 8979 RTU.
Communicates with multiple master stations,
over redundant communication lines.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
License D20MX
Base D20 Classic
Application Name
Group Application ID Application Version †
001
001
002
Description
A186-0
213
Western Power
Distribution (WPD) DTA
Calculates power from monitored voltage,
current, and phase angle. Also, performs time
integrated analog averaging, relative to the top
of the hour.
A193-0
302
Top of the Hour Analog
Averaging DTA
Performs time integrated analog averaging,
relative to the top of the hour.
A194-0N
101
Cooper 2179 DCA
Monitors and controls Cooper devices using
the Cooper 2179 protocol.
A195-0
110
Redundant I/O DTA
Provides I/O point redundancy.
A199-0N
106
HR6000/XA-21 (DPA) for
D20MX
Communicates with one or more hosts using
the Harris HR6000/XA-21 protocol, emulating
several HR6000/XA-21 LRUs. Supports multiple
communication ports, multiple LRUs per
communication port, and redundant porting.
B003
751
D.20 Peripheral Link DCA
The D.20 Peripheral Link is responsible for
surveillance and control of digital and analog
values in the D.20 I/O peripherals.
B008-1
311
System Point Database
Maintains the database of system points in the
RTU.
B012N
201
IRIG-B DCA for D20MX
Provides Universal Time Coordination (UTC)
using the IRIG-B pulse frame, as specified by
IRIG Standard 200-04 September 2004 Edition.
B013N
560
DNP V3.00 Data Link
Provides services for software applications to
send and receive messages using the
Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) V3.00 Data
Link protocol and the DNP V3.00 Transport
Functions
B014-1N
520
WESMAINT II+ for D20MX
RTU maintenance facility.
B015N
530
Bridgeman
Allows applications to communicate with other
peer applications. Automatically routing
messages to the destination application.
Intended to work within layered software
architectures. Provides the routing functions of
a network layer, but does not add a network
layer header to outgoing messages.
B023N
770
DNP V3.00 DCA
The Distributed Network Protocol V3.00 DCA
acts as the master to one or more remote
devices using the DNP V3.00 protocol.
B034N
203
Redundant Monitor for
D20MX
Monitors CCU states and initiates failover. Also,
receives command requests to perform
database synchronization, switchover and
failover.
B045-0
101
D20AC WESMAINT II+
Display Screens
Provides D20AC WESMAINT II+ displays
B052-0N
351
DNP Internet Data Link for DNP V3.00 data link over internet
D20MX
B058-0N
231
IEC 870-5 Data Link for
D20MX
FT 1.2 primary data link configuration
B060-0
210
IEC 870-5-101 DCA
Acts as a master (primary) communication
device, initiating data exchanges. It is capable
of sending control commands to the remote
devices, and processing data autonomously
collected by the data link layer.
B071-0
200
WESMAINT File Upload
Uploads files via the WESMAINT port as S
records or using ZMODEM.
B080-0
214
IEC 60870-5-103 DCA
Monitors and controls devices using the IEC
60870-5-103 protocol.
B082-0N
311
LogicLinx Executor WARP
for D20MX (Ethernet
capable)
The LogicLinx executor is responsible for
executing PLC programs written using the
LogicLinx PLC (IEC 1131-3 compliant) editor.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
21
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
License D20MX
Base D20 Classic
Application Name
Group Application ID Application Version †
Description
B085N
130
IEC Balanced Data Link
Provides services to send and receive
messages using the IEC 60870-5 FT 1.2
Balanced Protocol over point-to-point links,
with support for a dial-up modem. Works with
one user in point-to-point configurations, or
multiple users in dial-up configurations.
B086-0
131
IEC 60870-5-104 Data Link Provides a service to reliably transfer IEC
60870-5-101 Application Service Data Units
(ASDU) over a TCP/IP network. Implements this
service using the transport layer interface
protocol IEC 60870-5-104.
B099-0
113
SNTP Client DTA
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client
application provides reasonably accurate and
reliable time synchronization.
B100-0
141
Internet Protocol Stack
Configuration of the LAN
B119-1N
103
LAN Redundancy Manager Provides health and active pseudo DI points for
LAN Ports, as well as default gateway
monitoring and advanced routing
configuration.
B148-0
104
Time Zone and DST
Settings DTA
The Time Zone and DST (Daylight Saving Time)
provides a time zone and DST information to
other applications.
B009
401
Mailbox DTA
System point conversion application.
B021N
993
DNP V3.00 DPA for D20MX The Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) DPA
enables master stations to retrieve and modify
local data using the DNP V3.00 Application
Layer Protocol.
B009
310‡
Mailbox DTA
B021N
912 Ф
DNP V3.00 DPA for D20MX Same application as used in SAN0001 except it
allows you to avoid manually correcting some
configuration warnings after transferring D20
firmware containing B021 versions less than or
equal to 912.
SAN0001 Applications
SAN0002 Applications
Same application as used in SAN0001 except it
allows you to avoid manually correcting some
configuration warnings after transferring D20
firmware containing B009 versions less than or
equal to 310.
Table 3 provides the License Group legend.
Table 3: D20MX license group
NOTE
22
LIcense Group
Group Description
001
D2X Classic Applications
002
Advanced Automation Applications
The license group is an option in the D20MX order code. Refer to Table 10 and Table 11 for
details. Ordering a D20MX with a particular license group option enables all applications in
that group to run on the D20MX.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
Table 4 lists the embedded images included in the D20MX firmware.
The Version Image column indicates the image versions in the SAN0001 and SAN0002
files.
Table 4: D20MX embedded images
Image
ID
Image Name
Description
Version
Image
S032
D20S Peripheral Board (supports B003)
D20S Peripheral Board Code
303
S033
D20A Peripheral Board (supports B003)
D20A Peripheral Board Code
301
S034
D20K Peripheral Board (supports B003)
D20K Peripheral Board Code
306
S035
D20C Peripheral Board (supports B003)
D20C Peripheral Board Code
307
D20AC Peripheral Board Code
108
S055-0 D20AC Peripheral Board (supports B003)
Firmware/FPGA
versions
Refer to D20MX Release Notes (MIS-0095) available on the D20MX Documentation CD (GE
part number 588-0075).
D20 chassis
The D20 chassis is available in two versions:
•
Standard single slot chassis with one horizontal Eurocard slot for mounting the
D20ME/ME II board for the non-VME compatible version.
•
Full VME-equipped chassis with five horizontal expansion slots for VME compatible
printed circuit boards.
The D20 has a 3U horizontal slot chassis for 19" rack mounting. There are two types of
chassis; see Table 5.
Table 5: D20 chassis types
Chassis Type
Part #
Description
D20 non-VME
(1 slot horizontal)
500-0305
(Release 26 or higher)
Single Slot MX Chassis with backplane, external
power connections, and 7 serial I/O ports
D20 VME
(5 slot horizontal)
500-0280
(Release 16A or higher)
MX Chassis with 5 card VME backplane
Due to aging printed circuit board assembly and mechanical constraints, only certain
chassis from 2002 and onward can be used with a D20MX processor. The versions listed in
Table 5 have been confirmed to be compatible with the D20MX processor. For versions not
included in the table, consult with GE Grid Solutions Technical Support to determine
whether your installed D20 chassis can be retrofitted with a D20MX processor. Be prepared
to provide your D20 device serial number to Technical Support.
D20 chassis
compatibility
See Appendix Appendix G, Product Combinations on page 205, for the possible matching of
main processor board and Ethernet card combinations with Chassis types.
D20 non-VME
The D20 non-VME single-slot chassis consists of the following:
•
D20MX processor board
•
Modem slots
•
Power supply with switch and fuses; see Figure 1.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
23
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
Figure 1: D20 non-VME chassis - power supply switch and fuses
D20 non-VME Chassis
Power Supply Switch
Power Supply Fuses
This chassis contains the WESTERM D20M+ SS termination panel, which is attached
directly to the back of the assembly; see Figure 2.
Figure 2: D20 non-VME backplane
Power Supply
Connector Block
WESTERM D20M+
SS Termination Panel
D20 Non-VME Chassis
24
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
D20 VME
The D20 VME-compatible chassis (see Figure 3) can support one D20MX main board. When
using the D20MX in a VME chassis, the 0 V ground wire must be used.
Figure 3: D20 VME chassis - power supply switch and fuses
D20 VME Chassis
Power Supply Switch
Power Supply Fuses
This chassis (see Figure 4) contains the WESTERM D20M+ termination panel that is
mounted separately on the D20 chassis. The VME chassis kit includes a VME bus
backplane, called the WESTERM D20VME. The VME bus backplane connects to the
termination panel using a ribbon cable from Slot 1 on the bus backplane.
Figure 4: D20 VME chassis - VME bus backplane and D20M+ termination panel
WESTERM D20VME VME Bus Backplane
WESTERM D20M+
Termination Panel
D20 VME Chassis
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
25
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
D20 power supply
The chassis-mounted power supply modules are switch-mode converters that provide
output power for the D20MX processor board, VME cards, modems and D20 Peripheral I/O
modules, as required. A redundant power supply can be installed to provide fail-over
protection to ensure continuous power to the D20.
If you have an extended system with more than five peripherals, the chassis-mounted D20
power supply is not adequate. In this case, you need to install an external power supply.
The available power supplies are:
•
Standard chassis-mounted; see Table 6
•
Auxiliary; see Table 7
•
Redundant power supplies; see Table 8
Other power supplies are available for specific requirements. Contact GE Grid Solutions for
details.
Table 6: Standard chassis-mounted power supplies
GE part number
Input
Output
580-2004
20 to 60 V DC
+5 V, 7 A; +12 V, 2 A; -12 V, 1 A; 24 V DC, 3 A
580-2005
20 to 60 V DC
+5 V, 7 A; +12 V, 2 A; -12 V, 1 A; 48 V DC, 1.5 A
580-2006
100 to 300 V DC or 85 to 264 V AC +5 V, 7 A; +12 V, 2 A; -12 V, 1 A; 24 V DC, 3 A
580-2007
100 to 300 V DC or 85 to 264 V AC +5 V, 7 A; +12 V, 2 A; -12 V, 1 A; 48 V DC, 1.5 A
Table 7: Auxiliary power supplies - rack mounted
GE part number
Input
Output
Mounting
521-0103
20 to 60 VDC
24 VDC, 75 W
Rack mounted
521-0104
100 to 300 VDC
24 VDC, 75 W
Rack mounted
521-0105
90 to 250 VAC
24 VDC, 75 W
Rack mounted
521-0106
100 to 350 VDC
48 VDC, 120 W
Rack mounted
521-0107
90 to 250 VAC
48 VDC, 120 W
Rack mounted
Mounting
Table 8: Redundant power supplies
GE part number
Input
Output
580-0719
110 VAC or 125 VDC
24 VDC
580-0741
220 VAC or 48 VDC
48VDC
580-0789
110 VAC or 48 VDC
48 VDC
510-0241
115 VAC + 15% or
30 to 60 VDC
48 VDC, 2.5 A
Rack mounted
510-0242
115 VAC + 15% or
40 to 144 VDC
48 VDC, 2.5 A
Rack mounted
Over-current protection: Ensure your D20 power input is externally protected for overcurrent; otherwise damage to the D20MX may occur. The required fuse rating depends on
the power consumption of your system.
The D20 available power supplies, listed in Table 6 are equipped with two field replaceable
fuses.; see Figure 5.
26
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
Figure 5: D20 - Location of field-replaceable fuses
Field-replaceable
fuses
Field-replaceable fuses for the standard chassis-mounted Power Supplies are listed in
Table 9. These are the standard factory-installed fuses, unless otherwise specified. Always
replace with the same type and values of fuse.
Table 9: Field-replaceable fuses
Power Supply
Fuse
Fuse Function
Replacement Fuse
(¼inch by 1 ¼ inch Time Delay)
580 - 2004
F1
+DC Input
12 A / 250 V
F2
-DC Input
12 A / 250 V
F1
+DC Input
12 A / 250 V
F2
-DC Input
12 A / 250 V
F1
Line/+DC Input
4 A / 250 V
F2
Neutral/-DC Input
4 A / 250 V
F1
Line/+DC Input
4 A / 250 V
F2
Neutral/-DC Input
4 A / 250 V
580 - 2005
580 - 2006
580 - 2007
Modems
D20 modems (can be purchased separately) for communications to a host computer or to
other IEDs.
For example, WESDAC 202/V.23 is a 1200-baud Bell 202 or CCITT V.23 standard modem
designed for 300 to 1200 baud asynchronous operation on unconditioned lines and
supports the majority of SCADA/EMS applications. The 3U (GE part number 520-0120)
vertical mount configuration in the D20 chassis and the 19 inch rack mount (GE part
number 520-0090) version are currently not supported.
Third-party modems can be used to meet specific requirements. These modems are
connected to the D20 via standard RS-232 connections. Contact GE Grid Solutions for
more information on options.
If using a dial-up modem or high speed leased line modem, you must ensure the D20MX
port baud rate does not exceed the speed of the modem to modem link.
NOTE
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
27
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
NOTE
If using a switched-carrier modem on a port, and retries have increased after upgrading
from a D20ME to a D20MX, ensure Receive Squelch (also called DCD Wait, DCD Delay,
Receive Inhibit Time, or DCD to RX Enable Time) is configured in the serial application that
uses the port. Refer to the configuration guide of the serial application for further details.
Serial ports
The D20MX processor has seven native RS232 serial communications ports which are
brought out to the WESTERM D20M+ termination panel of the D20 chassis.
Figure 6 shows the position of the Serial Expansion Processor card and the Serial
Expansion Auxiliary card in the D20 chassis.
Figure 6: D20 - Location of Serial Expansion processor and auxiliary cards
Serial Expansion
Processor card
Serial Expansion Auxiliary cards
D20MX Processor module
A serial expansion of up to 21 additional serial ports (28 total) are supported by the D20MX
v1.5 (or higher) firmware release. For details, see “Serial” on page 57.
Serial Expansion options are available for 7, 14 or 21 ports to be ordered in a D20MX device
or kit. Serial expansion options can be ordered without a D20MX in order to upgrade
existing D20 devices that already contain the D20MX processor. For order option details,
see “Ordering guides” on page 32.
Serial Expansion requires the following components:
28
•
D20 VME chassis (500-0280)
•
D20MX processor
•
Firmware release v1.50 (or higher)
(Firmware release v1.40 (or lower) does not support Serial Expansion)
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
•
Serial Expansion Processor card
This card (see Figure 7) is installed at the PMC site on the D20MX processor.
For information on retrofitting an existing D20MX device with Serial Expansion, refer to
“Retrofit procedure - D20MX processor into a D20” on page 44, step 11.
Figure 7: D20 - D20MX Serial Expansion Processor card
•
Serial Expansion Auxiliary card (quantity 1, 2 or 3; each card supports 7 additional
RS232 serial communication ports)
These cards (see Figure 8) are required to breakout the RS232 signals from the Serial
Expansion Processor card to the D20 backplane and are installed in the D20 VME
chassis in processor slots 3, 4 and 5. The required cable(s) to connect from the Serial
Expansion Processor card to the Serial Expansion Auxiliary card(s) are included.
For information on retrofitting an existing D20MX device with Serial Expansion, refer to
“Retrofit procedure - D20MX processor into a D20” on page 44, step 13.
Figure 8: D20 - D20MX Serial Expansion Auxiliary card
•
WESTERM D20M+ termination panel (same quantity as the Serial Expansion Auxiliary
cards)
This assembly contains the DB9 connectors required to realize the RS232 port in a D20
device. The required cable to connect from the VME Bus Backplane assembly to the
WESTERM D20M+ termination panel is included.
NOTE
Each WESTERM D20M+ termination panel requires 3U of rack space and needs to be
mounted adjacent to the D20 chassis. Refer to the WESTERM D20M+ termination panel
section (below) for a description of the available mounting options.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
29
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
WESTERM D20M+ termination panel
The Serial IO WESTERM panel 19" (GE part number 517-0225) can be mounted in a rack.
With the standard D20 VME chassis the WESTERM D20M+ termination panel (see Figure 9)
is mounted separately into the 19" standard rack on a 2U mounting plate.
Figure 9: WESTERM D20M+ termination panel - back view - connections
Power termination block
Ribbon cable connector from the
WESTERM D20VME bus backplane
D.20 Link ports
There are three different ordering and mounting options available for the WESTERM D20M+
termination panel (also referred to as the Serial IO WESTERM panel).
Option A: Rack Mount
Figure 10 shows a side view of the equipment mounting dimensions for Option A, where
the WESTERM D20+ panel is mounted below the D20 chassis. The D20 chassis is 3 RU high,
the D20M+ panel is 2 RU high, with a recommended spacing of 1 RU between the D20
chassis and D20M+ panel.
Figure 11 shows a back view of the equipment mounting dimensions for Option A.
Figure 10: Option A rack mount (side view)- D20 chassis above D20M+ panel
20.1 cm
(7.9 in.)
13.3 cm
(5.25 in.)
4.4 cm
(1.75 in.)
8.9 cm
(3.5 in.)
30
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
Figure 11: Option A rack mount (back view)- D20 chassis above D20M+ panel
13.3 cm
(5.25 in.)
4.44 cm
(1.75 in.)
8.9 cm
(3.5 in.)
Option B: D20
Chassis-mount
The Serial IO WESTERM panel 19" can be mounted behind the WESTERM D20VME bus
backplane of the D20 VME chassis.
This mounting option occupies less rack space but increases the depth of the D20 chassis
installation.
Figure 12 shows a side view of the equipment mounting dimensions for Option B, where
the WESTERM D20+ panel is mounted on the back of the D20 chassis.
Figure 13 shows a back view of the equipment mounting dimensions for Option B.
Figure 12: Option B chassis mount (side view)- D20M+ panel attached to back of D20
chassis
28.6 cm
(11.28 in.)
13.3 cm
(5.25 in.)
Figure 13: Option B chassis mount (back view)- D20M+ panel attached to back of D20
chassis
13.3 cm
(5.25 in.)
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
31
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
Option C: D20
Chassis-mount with
extended bracket
The Serial IO WESTERM panel 19" can be mounted behind the WESTERM D20VME bus
backplane of the D20 VME chassis with an extended bracket (GE part number 952-2087).
Option C is similar to Option B, but with a deeper bracket to allow for easier access to
modem bays. More space is required when the D20MX processor with rear access fiber
Ethernet ports option is selected.
Figure 14 shows a side view of the equipment mounting dimensions for Option C, where
the WESTERM D20+ panel is mounted on an extended bracket on the back of the D20
chassis.
Figure 15 shows a back view of the equipment mounting dimensions for Option C.
Figure 14: Option C chassis mount (side view)- D20M+ panel attached to back of D20
chassis with extended bracket
32.5 cm
(12.8 in.)
13.3 cm
(5.25 in.)
Figure 15: Option C chassis mount (back view)- D20M+ panel attached to back of D20
chassis with extended bracket
13.3 cm
(5.25 in.)
Ordering guides
The latest ordering guides are available on the GE Grid Solutions website:
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/energy/catalog/D20MX.htm
You can select the required options from the available Product Option items. The Order
Code automatically updates as each option is selected.
The ordering guides are available in the following tables:
•
“D20 - D20MX order codes” on page 34
•
“D20MX upgrade kits order guide” on page 35
The Ordering Guide information provided in this manual does not reflect the full complexity
of the ordering options provided on the GEGE Grid Solutions Online Store; the Online Store
provides the full set of D20MX options and their sub-option inter-dependencies while this
manual shows all sub-options, regardless of the parent option chosen.
For example, the Ordering Guide in this manual shows Modem Slot 1 options E and F. Note
however that, options E and F are:
32
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
•
Only available if D20MX Processor Slot Option G is chosen.
•
Not available if either D20MX Processor Slot Option A (D20MX Dual 10/100/1000BaseTX Ethernet Ports - front access) or D20MX Processor Slot Option C (D20MX Dual
100Base-FX Ethernet Ports - front access) is chosen.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
33
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
D20 - D20MX substation controller ordering guide
Table 10: D20 - D20MX order codes
D20MX CPU Options
D20MX -* * *
(A) - D20MX non-VME, dual 10/100/1000BASE-TX Ethernet Ports (front access)
A
(C) - D20MX non-VME dual 100BASE-FX ST Ethernet Ports (front access)
C
(G) - D20MX non-VME, dual 100BASE-FX Ethernet Ports (rear access)
D20MX Power Supply
*
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
U U *
G
D20MX -* * *
(A) - D20 Power Supply, 20-60VDC Input, 24V ISO Output
A
(B) - D20 Power Supply, 20-60VDC Input, 48V ISO Output
B
(C) - D20 Power Supply, 100-300VDC/85-264VAC Input, 24V ISO Output
C
(D) - D20 Power Supply, 100-300VDC/85-264VAC Input, 48V ISO Output
D
D20MX Modem slots 1, 2 & 3
*
D20MX -* * *
(U) - Empty slot with cover plate
U U U
(C) - Telenetics 14400 baud modem 2-wire dial up
C
(D) - Telenetics 14400 baud modem 4-wire leased line
D D D
(E) - D20MX dual 100BASE-FX ST Media Interface Card
E
(F) - D20MX dual 100 BASE-FX LC Media Interface Card
D20MX Serial Termination Panel Options
C
C
F
D20MX -* * *
*
*
(A) - 19" Rack Mount Serial IO Westerm Panel
A
(B) - D20 Chassis Mounted Serial IO Westerm Panel
B
(C) - D20 Chassis Mounted Serial IO Westerm Panel w/Extended Bracket
C
D20MX Firmware Options
D20MX -* * *
*
*
*
(**) -D20MX firmware (Refer to the GE Grid Solutions online store for available
firmware options)
D20MX D2X CLASSIC Applications License
D20MX -* * *
*
*
*
(U) - Not required
U
(A) - D2X CLASSIC APPLICATIONS
A
D20MX ADVANCED AUTOMATION Applications License
D20MX -* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
(U) - Not required
U
(B) - ADVANCED AUTOMATION APPLICATIONS
B
FUTURE Feature
D20MX -* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
D20MX -* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
D20MX -* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
(U) - Not required
U U *
U
FUTURE Feature
(U) - Not required
U
D20MX Serial Expansion
(U) - Not required
U
(A) - 7 additional ports (14 ports total. 1x 19" Rack Mount Serial IO Westerm
Panel included). See Note below.
A
(B) - 14 additional ports (21 ports total. 2x 19" Rack Mount Serial IO Westerm
Panel included). See Note below.
B
(C) - 21 additional ports (28 ports total. 3x 19" Rack Mount Serial IO Westerm
Panel included). See Note below.
C
The 19" Rack Mounted Serial IO Westerm Panel included with the Serial Expansion options
must be installed directly below the D20 chassis.
NOTE
34
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
D20MX upgrade kits
Table 11 provides the available D20MX upgrade kits and spare kit (D20MX CPU only) Order
Guide. Order the SGConfig Setup Software DVD (GE part number 588-0082) if required.
Table 11: D20MX upgrade kits order guide
D20MX Kit Type
D20MXK -* *
(A) - Upgrade Kit for D20 Horizontal chassis
A
(D) - Upgrade Kit for D20 Horizontal chassis - Single Slot
D
(C) - D20MX CPU only
C
(E) - Serial Expansion only for D20 Horizontal chassis
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
*
U U *
E
D20MX CPU Options
D20MXK -* *
(U) - Not required
U
(A) - D20MX non-VME, dual 10/100/1000BASE-TX Ethernet Ports (front access)
A
(C) - D20MX non-VME dual 100BASE-FX-ST Ethernet Ports (front access)
C
(G) - D20MX non-VME, dual 100BASE-FX Ethernet Ports (rear access)
G
D20MX Media Interface Card Options
D20MXK -* *
(U) - Not required
U
(E) - D20MX dual 100BASE-FX ST Media Interface Card
E
(F) - D20MX dual 100 BASE-FX LC Media Interface Card
F
D20MX Firmware Options
D20MXK -* *
*
(**) -D20MX firmware (Refer to the GE Grid Solutions online store for available firmware
options)
D20MX D2X CLASSIC Applications License
D20MXK -* *
*
(U) - Not required
U
(A) - D2X CLASSIC APPLICATIONS
A
D20MX ADVANCED AUTOMATION Applications License
D20MXK -* *
*
*
*
*
(U) - Not required
U
(B) - ADVANCED AUTOMATION APPLICATIONS
B
FUTURE Feature
D20MXK -* *
*
*
*
*
*
(U) - Not required
U U *
U
FUTURE Feature
D20MXK -* *
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
D20MXK -* *
*
*
*
*
*
U U *
(U) - Not required
D20MX Serial Expansion
(U) - Not required
U
(A) - 7 additional ports (14 ports total)
A
(B) - 14 additional ports (21 ports total)
B
(C) - 21 additional ports (28 ports total)
C
The Serial IO Westerm panel is not included with Serial Expansion in the kits.
NOTE
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
35
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
Specifications
The D20MX adheres to the following system, communications, electrical, physical and
environmental specifications. Additional Standards and Protection are listed in Appendix B,
Standards & Protection.
Processor
Processor
667 MHz embedded PowerQUICC II Pro
Memory
1024 MB of 266 MHz DDR2 RAM with ECC
16 MB NVRAM for persistent event storage
Storage
8 MB boot flash
256 MB firmware flash
Operating system
VxWorks
LED indicators
System status: Power, Ready
Ethernet port status: Link and Activity status per port
Power supply: Power
IRIG: Flashes when active.
Network connections
Dual redundant Ethernet interface
Twisted Pair
10/100/1000BaseT (Isolated RJ-45 connector)
100BaseFX (Fiber Optic: 1300 nm, 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm multi-mode
duplex fiber cable, ST connectors)
Communications
Serial communications D.20 Link, 2 channels
Data rate: 250 kbps
Surge protected to ±2000 V peak
RS-232, 7 channels
5-signal (TXD, RXD, RTS#, CTS#, DCD#) DTE ports
Data rate: independently-selectable; refer to the application configuration
guides.
Electrical (D20
horizontal chassis)
Maintenance Port
RS-232, 1 channel/ 2 ports
2-signal (TXD, RXD)
Data rate: 9600 (or 19200 bps)
Rated power supplies
AC-DC
100 to 240 V AC (±10%) 143 W output maximum
Minimum/Maximum AC voltage: 90 V AC / 265 V AC
100 to 300 V DC (±10%) 143 W output maximum
Minimum/Maximum DC voltage: 88 V DC / 330 V DC
DC-DC
20 to 55 V DC (±10%) 135 W maximum
Minimum/Maximum DC voltage: 18 V DC / 60 V DC
Peak inrush current at AC-DC
25 °C on cold start
DC-DC
Rated frequency
(AC-DC)
36
50 A, max at 230 V AC
50 A, max at 230 V AC
50/60 Hz nominal (47 to 63 Hz)
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
Physical (D20
horizontal chassis)
Overall height
40.34 mm (1.588 in.)
Width
261.87 mm (10.31 in.)
Depth
160 mm (6.3 in.)
D20MX weight
0.7 kg (1.65 lb)
Fiber card weight
0.2 kg (0.35 lb)
Battery shipping
restrictions
The D20MX does not contain a battery and is therefore not affected by
US DOT or ICAO shipping restrictions.
Material/Finish
Galvannealed steel with black power coat
Kit package
Length:
Width:
Height:
Weight:
Operating temperature
0°C to +70°C
Note: Do not operate the D20MX above 60°C for extended periods of
time as this shortens the life of the super capacitor and reduces the
backup time of the real time clock.
Humidity rating
5% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
Environmental rating
Ingress protection: IP30 (IEC 60529)
Installation /
overvoltage category
CAT II (2)
Pollution degree
2
Use
Indoor use only
Operating altitude
Maximum altitude 3000 m [9480 feet] above sea level
MTBF (MIL-HDBK-217):
D20MX processor board
Non-VME with 10/100/1000BASE-TX copper: 449,616 hours at 40°C
Non-VME with 100BASE-FX fiber optic: 265,657 hours at 40°C
Configuration
Performed using SGConfig 8.5 and higher
49.5 cm (19.5 in.)
34.3 cm (13.5 in.)
15.2 cm (6 in.)
2.54 kg (5.6 lb)
Environmental
Software
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
37
CHAPTER 1: BEFORE YOU START
Storage recommendations
Storage conditions
Always store the D20MX in an environment compatible with operating conditions.
Recommended environmental conditions for storage are:
•
Temperature: -40 °C to +85 °C
•
Relative humidity: 5% to 95%, non-condensing
•
Maximum altitude: 12192 m [40,000 feet] above sea level
Do not store the D20MX above 60°C for extended periods of time as this shortens the life of
the super capacitor and reduces the backup time of the real time clock.
NOTE
When powered off, the D20MX real time clock remains active for 14 days at -40°C to 60°C,
and greater than one month at 25°C. Information in the NVRAM remains stored indefinitely
since flash memory is used.
38
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 2: Installing the D20
Substation Controller
Installing the D20 Substation Controller
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Required tools and materials
•
Installation procedure - D20 Substation Controller
•
Rack installation
•
D20 chassis layouts
Required tools and materials
Before beginning the installation procedures, have the following tools and equipment
available:
•
Flathead screwdriver with 0.6 x 3.5 mm blade (for terminal block wiring)
•
#2 Phillips screwdriver (for rack mounting the unit)
•
Wire cutters (for field wiring)
•
Wire strippers (for field wiring)
•
Wire crimping tool (for field wiring)
•
Tie-wraps (for organizing wiring and cables)
•
Multimeter (for testing voltages and I/O points)
•
Needle nose pliers (for setting jumpers, for example)
•
PROM puller (only required if you are going to be upgrading or installing PROMs in the
field)
•
Labelling device to label cables and wires
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
39
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLING THE D20 SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
Installation procedure - D20 Substation Controller
To install the D20 Substation Controller:
1.
Unpack the system components and report any damage.
1.1.
Carefully remove the D20 Substation Controller from its packaging.
1.2.
Open the product package and check that the following items have been
delivered:
–
Chassis
–
Main processor board
–
Power supply
–
WESMAINT maintenance port cable
–
Software loaded into the D20MX Substation Controller, See “Configuring
the Software” on page 77.
–
Termination panel: Based on the order code will be either be; 19" Rack
mount, D20 Chassis Rear Mount or D20 Chassis Rear Mount Extended.
–
Modems (options for the Main Chassis kit).
1.3.
Visually inspect the unit to ensure it has not sustained any visible damage
during transit. If there are visible signs of damage, report it immediately to the
carrier. Contact GE Grid Solutions Technical Support to return the D20
Substation Controller; see section: “Product returns” on page 10.
1.4.
Verify that you have received all items. GE parts include a unique number,
typically in the format XXX-XXXX, that can be used as a reference.
2.
Mount the D20 Substation Controller.
3.
Perform all field wiring connections and jumper settings. See section: “Connecting to
Devices and Networks” on page 55.
4.
Connect the power supply to the D20 chassis.
5.
Power-up the D20 Substation Controller and check for normal operation. See section:
“Powering-up and Testing a D20 Substation Controller” on page 71.
Some testing requires that code and configuration files have been downloaded to the
D20 Substation Controller.
6.
Start using the D20MX’s tools and utilities to configure and monitor the operation of
the D20MX. See “Using the D20MX Substation Controller” on page 109.
Rack installation
Rack spacing for free
airflow
40
When mounting multiple D20s in a rack (or if mounting a D20 in a rack with other
equipment) verify that there is at least one rack unit (RU) of space above and below the D20
to allow for cooling airflow (1 RU = 1.75 inches).
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLING THE D20 SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
D20 chassis layouts
Your D20 Substation Controller can comprise one of three D20 chassis layouts; see
“Installation procedure - D20 Substation Controller” on page 40.
The D20 non-VME chassis front panel layouts for the D20MX upgrade kits comprise:
•
A D20 containing a D20MX with front Ethernet connectors; see Figure 16.
•
A D20 containing a D20MX with front Fiber Optic connectors; see Figure 17.
•
A D20 containing a D20MX with rear Fiber Optic connectors; see Figure 18.
Figure 16: D20 chassis front panel - D20MX with Ethernet connectors
D20 chassis
D20MX cover
plate
D20MX processor
D20MX cover plate filler
Protective earth
terminal
D20 power supply
Figure 17: D20 chassis front panel - D20MX with front fiber optic connectors
D20 chassis
D20MX cover
plate
D20MX processor
D20MX cover plate filler
Protective earth
terminal
D20 power supply
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
41
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLING THE D20 SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
Figure 18: D20 chassis front panel - D20MX with rear fiber optic connectors
D20 chassis
D20MX cover
plate
D20MX processor
D20MX cover plate filler
D20MX Fiber Optic card
D20 power supply
42
GE INFORMATION
Protective earth
terminal
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 3: Retrofitting the D20MX in
an Existing D20 Chassis
Retrofitting the D20MX in an Existing D20 Chassis
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Required tools and materials
•
Retrofit procedure - D20MX processor into a D20
•
Unpacking and inspecting the D20MX
•
D20 chassis layouts
•
Connecting the power supply to the D20MX
•
Grounding theD20MX
The D20MX processor board can be installed in an existing D20 device to replace D20ME
D20M++, or D20MEII processor boards. If a D20 is being retrofitted, the following limitations
exist:
•
You cannot install multiple D20MX processor boards in a single D20. If more than
seven serial ports are required, you must purchase a Serial Expansion kit. See section:
“D20MX upgrade kits” on page 35.
•
The D20MX supports 100BASE-FX instead of 10BASE-FL. If you are using any other
devices in your system, and you are limited to 10BASE-FL, you must purchase a
100BASE-FX to 10BASE-FL media converter.
The D20MX can be installed in a VME chassis or a non-VME chassis.
See section: “D20MX upgrade kits” on page 35 for a list of available upgrade kits and the
parts provided within each kit.
Required tools and materials
Before beginning the installation procedures, have the following tools and equipment
available:
•
Appropriate device cables for D.20 connections (GE part number 977-0089)
•
For D20MX Non-VME with Dual 10/100/1000Base-TX (part number 526-3001): CAT5
network cables for RJ-45 Ethernet connections (GE part number 977-0280 or
equivalent)
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
43
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
•
For D20MX Non-VME with Dual 100Base-FX (part number 526-3003) and D20MX NonVME with Dual 100Base-FX Fiber Optic Card (part number 526-3005): multi-mode
duplex fiber cable - ST connectors.
•
Flathead screwdriver with 0.6 mm by 3.5 mm blade (for terminal block wiring)
•
#1 Phillips screwdriver (for panel or DIN rail mounting the unit)
•
#2 Phillips screwdriver (for rack mounting the unit)
•
Needle-nose pliers
•
Wire cutters
•
Wire strippers
•
Approved network settings for the device
•
Windows-based PC with any Windows-based terminal emulation software and Web
browser software installed
•
12 AWG wire (minimum) for protective earth
•
2 ring connectors, Panduit part number PV10-14R for 12 AWG [3.3 mm²] wire for
protective earth terminal
Retrofit procedure - D20MX processor into a D20
To retrofit the VME chassis and the non-VME chassis:
1.
Unpack the system components and report any damage. See section: “Unpacking and
inspecting the D20MX” on page 52.
2.
Ensure that you are sufficiently grounded to prevent ESD damage to the D20MX or
other components. See section: “Grounding the D20MX” on page 54.
3.
Remove the D20MX from its static-protective packaging. Set the packaging aside and
save it for future reuse.
The D20MX must be placed on an anti-static surface while not installed in the chassis.
Handle the D20MX with care, since SMT components are located on the bottom side.
NOTE
44
4.
Switch the power off for the D20 chassis.
5.
Prepare an ESD safe work area and ensure you are sufficiently grounded.
6.
Remove the D20ME, D20M++, or D20ME II module.
7.
Remove the D20EME module and D20EME Media Interface Card.
8.
Remove the filler plate below the D20MX processor and the blanking faceplate above
the D20MX processor.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
9.
If the D20MX is rear fiber access type, install the Media Interface Card in Modem slot 1:
9.1.
Move a previously installed modem to Modem slot 2.
9.2.
Install the D20MX Media Interface Card in Modem slot 1. Ensure that the cable
is not pinched. See Figure 19, “Cable to fiber optic daughter card”.
Figure 19: Cable to fiber optic daughter card
P1 connector on Fiber
optic daughter card
Cable
J3 and J4 connectors
on D20MX PCB
D20 Chassis - view
through top panel
10. If the D20MX is being installed in a VME chassis, connect the 0V+GND cable (GE part
number 975-1239):
10.1. Remove the original 0V cable from the 0V terminal on the backplane; see
Figure 20.
Figure 20: D20 - remove original 0 V cable
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
45
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
10.2. Insert the piggy-back connector of 975-1239 to the 0V terminal; see Figure 21.
Figure 21: D20 - install 975-1239
10.3. Re-install the original 0V cable to the 975-1239 piggy back terminal; see
Figure 22.
Figure 22: D20 - re-install original 0 V cable
46
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
10.4. Route the 975-1239 cable to exit at the top of the chassis; add cable ties to
secure the wire bundle; see Figure 23.
Figure 23: D20 - route from 0 V terminal up to top
10.5. Route the 975-1239 cable over the rear extension bracket, behind the
Termination Panel PCBA, and connect to the Termination Panel.
See Figure 24.
Figure 24: D20 - connect to TB2-8 and TB2-9
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
47
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
10.6. Insert the ferrule (with two wires) end of 975-1239 into position 9 of TB2 and
tighten the screw terminal.
10.7. Insert the Green wire with stripped end of 975-1239 into position 8 of TB2 and
tighten the screw terminal.
11. If the D20MX requires Serial Expansion, install the Serial Expansion processor:
11.1. Use a Torx #T8 screw driver and a 5mm nut driver to remove the 2 screws with
nyloc nuts at the PCM site on the D20MX.
The PCB assemblies include small sensitive electronic components. Take care when
removing and installing screws and nuts near to these components.
NOTE
11.2. Remove the PMC filler plate from the D20MX faceplate; see Figure 25.
Figure 25: Remove PMC filler plate
11.3. Remove the D20MX Serial Expansion Processor from its static-protective
packaging and locate the hardware kit (2 stand-offs and 4 screws) attached to
the packaging.
48
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
11.4. Install the two stand-offs to the D20MX Serial Expansion Processor with the 2
screws supplied; see Figure 26.
The 2 remaining screws will be required to secure the Serial Expansion
Processor to the D20MX.
NOTE
Figure 26: Serial expansion processor with stand-offs
11.5. Align the 2 PMC connectors and the center alignment pin on the SE Processor
with the D20MX.
11.6. Support the front of the SE Processor and firmly mate the SE Processor to the
D20MX; see Figure 27.
NOTE
The PCB assemblies have SMT components mounted on both sides of the
assembly and caution must be taken when resting on table surface and during
the installation process.
Figure 27: Serial expansion processor - install on D20MX processor
11.7. Install the Torx #T8 screws and 5mm nyloc nuts removed in step 11.1. The
screws are inserted from the bottom of the D20MX and the nuts are secured on
top of the SE Processor.
The PCB assemblies include small sensitive electronic components. Take care when
removing and installing screws and nuts near to these components.
NOTE
11.8. Install the 2 remaining screws from the kit into the stand-offs at the front of the
PMC. The screws are inserted from the bottom of the D20MX.
11.9. Inspect the PMC connectors and confirm they are fully seated.
11.10. Install the PMC filler plate removed in step 11.2.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
49
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
12. Install the D20MX in Processor slot 1 and tighten the front panel retaining screws to
3.5 in-lbs to secure the D20MX to the chassis.
13. If the D20MX requires Serial Expansion, install the Serial Expansion auxiliary cards:
13.1. Confirm that all levers on the 40 pin connectors (both on the Processor and
Auxiliary card) are in the open position.
13.2. Orient the interconnect cable with pin 1 (indicated by the blue marker) to the
right. The connector at the top will have the locating feature facing upwards.
Insert top connector into the Auxiliary card.
13.3. Install Serial Expansion Auxiliary card into the appropriate Processor slot with
the appropriate interconnect cable length.
13.3.1. Use the PCB handles on the SE Auxiliary card to hold the assembly
firmly and align with the card guide rails in the chassis.
Ensure the card properly aligns with the rails for a smooth installation. A slight
angle will cause the card to catch on the rails and jam.
NOTE
13.3.2. Use the bottom handle to push and the inner handle to guide the PCB
assembly.
13.3.3. Once fully inserted, push on both handle to fully seat the PCB assembly
into the backplane
13.4. Install the lose connector of the interconnect cable into the appropriate header
on the SE Processor.
13.5. Repeat step 13 for additional Serial Expansion Auxiliary card using table below
SE Auxiliary
card
Processor slot Cable length
SE Processor
header
SGConfig port
name
1
3
3 inches
P1
CB1 to CB7
2
4
5 inches
P2
CC1 to CC7
3
5
5 inches
P3
CD1 to CD7
Depending on the Upgrade kit options selected; 1, 2, or 3 auxiliary cards can be
installed in the D20 device. Figure 28 shows the Serial Expansion processor
header designations.
Figure 28: Serial expansion processor - header designations
P1
P2
P3
P4
14. Install the lower filler plate (GE part number 953-1015) below the D20MX processor.
15. Install the upper blanking faceplate (GE part number 953-1035) above the D20MX
processor.
The rubber pads on the inside surface of the blanking faceplate must align with the
PCB handles on the SE Auxiliary card.
NOTE
50
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
16. Install the ferrite clamp included in the package to the power inlet cable:
16.1. Ensure that you are sufficiently grounded to prevent ESD damage to the
D20MX or other components.
16.2. Remove ferrite clamp (GE part number 460-0073) from the package; handle
with care as the magnetic material is fragile.
16.3. Pass the power cable through the channel, approximately 15 cm (6 inches)
from the connector on the chassis.
16.4. Loop the power cable one more time around and through the core; see
Figure 29.
Figure 29: Open ferrite clamp
16.5.
15.5. Close the core and snap the halves together; see Figure 30.
Figure 30: Closed ferrite clamp
16.6.
15.6. Visually inspect the installation and confirm that the assembly has
completely latched and that the power cable is not pinched. Also check that
none of the power cable connections have come loose during the installation
process.
17. Connect the power to the D20MX. Refer to section: “Connecting the power supply to a
D20MX” on page 53.
18. Connect ground to the D20MX. Refer to section: “Grounding the D20MX” on page 54.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
51
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
Unpacking and inspecting the D20MX
To unpack and inspect the D20MX:
1.
Unpack the system components and report any damage.
2.
Carefully remove the D20MX from its packaging.
3.
Open the product package and check that the following items have been delivered:
–
D20MX unit (GE part number 526-3001, or 526-3003, or 526-3005)
–
For 526-3005LF only:
– D20MX to Fiber Card Harness (975-1236)
– D20MX 100BASE-FX Rear LC FO Card (part number 526-3103LF) or D20MX
100BASE-FX Rear ST FO Card (part number 526-3104LF)
–
Lower filler plate (part number 953-1015)
–
Blank plate for D20MX install (part number 953-1014)
–
0 V wire cable (part number 975-1237)
–
For 526-3005LF installed in 500-0280 only:
–
Termination Panel, D20MX extended mounting (952-2087)
–
GE Grid Solutions Product Documentation CD (GE part number 581-0002)
–
GE Grid Solutions D20MX Documentation CD (GE part number 588-0075 VXX)
4.
Visually inspect the unit to ensure it has not sustained any visible damage during
transit. If there are visible signs of damage, report it immediately to the carrier.
5.
Verify that you have received all items. GE parts include a unique number, typically in
the format XXX-XXXX, that can be used as a reference.
D20 chassis layouts
Installation of the D20MX can be performed with one of three D20 chassis layouts; see
“D20 chassis layouts” on page 41.
52
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
Connecting the power supply to a D20MX
The D20MX processor board is supplied power through the WESTERM D20M+ SS
backplane. Power connections to the backplane are made on connector block TB1.
For the WESTERM D20M+ SS and WESTERM D20M+ (see Figure 31, “WESTERM D20M+SS:
power supply connections”) the power supply connections:
•
1 and 2 are used for input power connections based on the D20 power supply
•
4 and 5 can be used as a switched auxiliary power supply source
•
7 and 8 can be used externally for status wetting, contact wetting and/or
miscellaneous power connections, if applicable.
Figure 31: WESTERM D20M+SS: power supply connections
14 AWG
(green)
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
53
CHAPTER 3: RETROFITTING THE D20MX IN AN EXISTING D20 CHASSIS
Grounding the D20MX
Surge and noise suppression components used on the D20MX are designed to prevent
nuisance operation and damage to internal components. To ensure correct protective
operation, the earth ground wire (14AWG green wire) on the D20 chassis must be
connected to a low impedance ground rail of a secondary cabinet or rack.
When making ground connections, ensure that all surfaces that are used for grounding
are free of dirt, residue and corrosion.
An electrical surge or ESD event can damage the D20MX processor. To prevent damage to
the D20MX, connect the earth ground to the signal ground on the terminal block (TB2)
located on the WESTERM Termination Panel. The earth ground terminal is position 8 on TB2
and the signal ground terminal is position 9 on TB2. For example, see the VME WESTERM
Termination board in Figure 32, “VME WESTERM termination panel - earth ground and
signal ground connection”. In cases where two wires are required to be connected to a
single terminal, a two-wire ferrule should be used.
Figure 32: VME WESTERM termination panel - earth ground and signal ground
connection
54
GE WESTERM D20
*517-0230*
517-0230
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 4: Connecting to Devices
and Networks
Connecting to Devices and Networks
This chapter provides guidelines for making physical connections between the D20 and
substation and network devices.
Cabling overview
All physical connections are made to the connectors on the rear backplane of the D20
chassis or to the front on the D20MX processor module.
D20MX front panel connectors
The D20MX front panel can have one of the following layouts:
•
Ethernet connectors (RJ45); see Figure 33.
•
Front access Fiber optic connectors (ST); see Figure 34.
•
Rear access Fiber optic connectors on a fiber optic daughter card; see Figure 35. The
optic daughter card can be either a D20MX dual 100 BASE-FX ST Media Interface Card
or a D20MX dual 100 BASE-FX LC Media Interface Card.
For a description of the operational status LEDs and port status LEDs, see “D20MX
processor front panel LEDs ” on page 109.
Figure 33: D20MX front panel with Ethernet connectors
Port 1
Status LEDs
Ethernet
Port 1
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Port 2
Status LEDs
Ethernet
Port 2
GE INFORMATION
RS232
USB Port (not
Serial Port supported)
Operational
Status LEDs
55
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
Figure 34: D20MX front panel with front access fiber optic connectors
Fiber
Optic
Port 1
Port
Status
LEDs
Fiber
Optic
Port 2
USB Port
RS232
(not
Serial Port
supported)
Operational
Status LEDs
The D20MX can be used with an ST connector Fiber Optic card or an LC connector Fiber
Optic card.
Figure 35: D20MX front panel and fiber optic card with rear access fiber optic
connectors
D20 chassis back view –
Either an ST or LC connector Media Interface Card
ST Media Interface
Fiber Optic card
LC Media Interface
Fiber Optic card
Fiber
Optic
Port 1
Fiber
Optic
Port 1
Fiber
Optic
Port 2
Fiber
Optic
Port 2
D20MX front panel
Fiber Optic
Port Status
LEDs
56
GE INFORMATION
USB Port
RS232
(not
Serial Port
supported)
Operational
Status LEDs
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
General cabling requirements
Table 12 lists the cables required to connect to the D20MX:
Table 12: Connection cables
Media
Designation
Cabling
Connector
Serial
RS-232
Shielded
DB-9 female
D.20 Link
RS-485
2 wire
Shielded
DB-9 female
Twisted Pair Ethernet
(GE part number 526-3001 only)
10/100/1000BASE-T UTP (Unshielded Twisted
Pair) – CAT 5 or better
Fiber optic
(GE part number 526-3003 and
526-3005LF only)
100BASE-FX
RJ-45
1300 nm, 50/125 μm and ST-style
62.5/125 μm multimode connectors
duplex fiber cable
To provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark radiated emission compliance, the
serial cables used for permanent serial and D.20 Link connections must comply with the
following requirements:
•
Cables must be shielded
•
D-type connector covers must provide EMC shielding (e.g. metallized plastic or die cast
metal covers).
Serial
Seven serial communications ports are brought out to the backplane connector P2. These
serial ports are five-signal (TXD, RXD, RTS#, CTS#, DCD#) DTE serial ports, compliant to
ANSI/TIA-232 and TIA/EIA-694 specifications and are hosted by UARTs.
The D20MX is tested with all 7 serial ports running at 19200 baud with 20% CPU utilization.
Refer to application configuration guides for supported baud rates and for data bits.
To avoid burning out the WESTERM or D20MX mainboard when directly connecting a rearpanel serial port on one D20MX chassis to another rear-panel serial port on any type of
D20 chassis, jumper the WESTERM of both chassis' to not provide a power connection to
pin 4. Refer to the appropriate WESTERM module layout for jumper settings.
D.20 Link
Communications between the D20 and the D20 peripheral I/O modules are carried over a
high-speed, high-level data link control (HDLC) protocol called the D.20 Link. The D.20 Link
has the following features:
•
RS-485 serial link, half duplex, 250 kbps
•
D.20 frame using HDLC protocol format with Manchester encoding
•
Supports up to 38 D20 I/O peripheral modules in a standard configuration
Media options:
•
RS-485, 24 AWG twisted pair, for applications up to 330 meters
•
Multi-Mode Glass Fiber (GFO), up to 2 km
•
Plastic Fiber (PFO), up to 60 meters
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
57
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
If you are using the D20 as a Master Data Concentrator, then the D.20 Link connectors are
not used.
The D.20 Link can also be used to supply power to peripherals on smaller D20 horizontal
slot chassis devices. Power supply to the WESDAC/WESTERM peripheral pairings is through
the WESTERM boards. For details, see the D20/D200 Installation and Operations Guide (part
number 994-0078); see section: Connections and Configuration.
Second D.20 link
Redundant D.20 communication channels are available on all peripherals. Daughter
boards are required to support this functionality:
•
Part number: 540-0207, for the A, S and K boards
•
Part number: 540-0209 for the C board
D.20 communications interface
Use the D.20 Communication Interface module when you require one-to-one
communication links with peripherals.
D.20 splitter
Use the D.20 Splitter when you require one-to-four communication links with peripherals,
especially if peripherals are clustered in different areas of the substation.
D.20 RS-485 interface
The D.20 RS-485 Interface provides the repeater function, which can only be implemented
on the D.20 Communications Interface.
GFO and PFO adaptors
Glass Fiber Optic (GFO) and Plastic Fiber Optic (PFO) adaptors are used to provide either
glass or plastic fiber optical cable extensions to the D.20 Link. These allow interference free
links to peripherals that are sited at a remote distance from the main D20 installation.
Extended power
When power requirements for multiple peripherals exceed the base system limitations, use
the D.20 DC Interface module.
D.20 DC interface
The D.20 DC Interface module is used:
•
As power input for additional peripherals on a D.20 Link
Interposing relays
The required rating of the relays on the K and C boards is determined by the loading
characteristics of the device that the boards control.
If the load rating of the controlled device exceeds the K or C board relay rating, then you
need an Interposing Relay panel.
58
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
Universal Protocol Converter
A Universal Protocol Converter (UPC) is required when the D20 has to communicate with a
device that uses a synchronous communications format. The function of the UPC is to
convert between the D20's asynchronous format, and the device's synchronous format.
Peripherals
Peripheral I/O modules are intelligent modules containing an on-board microprocessor.
They are configured as slaves to the D20MX processor board. In this way, specific I/O
processing is distributed throughout the RTU to the appropriate I/O module.
There are five types of I/O peripherals:
•
D20A analog input
•
D20S digital inputs
•
D20K digital output
•
D20C combination input/output
•
D20AC alternating current analog input
Optional high-voltage peripherals are also available.
The D20MX is only compatible with certain peripheral common code (i.e., pcommon)
versions as defined in Table 13.
Table 13: Peripherals compatible with the D20MX
I/O peripheral
PCOMMON version compatibility
PERFPAL version compatibility
D20C
P022 - PCOMMON2:
• 3.05, 3.00 are compatible
• 2.21 and earlier are NOT compatible
PERFPAL 3 1.2 with OLD Base setting is
compatible
PERFC 00 with NEW Base setting is
compatible
D20A, D20S and
D20K
P010 - PCOMMON:
• 3.06, 3.05, 3.01, 3.00 are compatible
• 2.21 and earlier are NOT compatible
PERFPAL 1 1.5 with OLD Base setting is
compatible
PERFASK 00 with NEW Base setting is
compatible
D20AC
P087 - pBOOT 1.04, 1.03, 1.02 are
compatible
-
For further information on I/O peripherals, see the D20/D200 Installation and Operations
Guide (part number 994-0078); see section: Connections and Configuration.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
59
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
Twisted-pair Ethernet (for 526-3001 only)
The10/100/1000BASE-T variant of the D20MX can connect to one or two networks through
two twisted-pair Ethernet connections. In redundant LAN mode this causes the two
Ethernet connections to use the same MAC address. Port 1 is the primary port and Port 2 is
the secondary port. When the device detects a signal on Port 1, Ethernet traffic takes place
on Port 1. When the device detects loss of signal on Port 1, Ethernet traffic takes place on
port 2.
All RJ-45 connectors have the same signal definition. However, the twisted-pair Ethernet
ports are auto MDI/MDIX and can support a straight-through or crossover cable.
NOTE
To connect the D20MX
to network devices
NOTE
The D20MX does not require Ethernet switches to use Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), but for
switches configured to use STP, you must configure the switch ports that are connected to
the D20MX as edge ports.
Plug network cables into the D20MX twisted-pair Ethernet ports.
If the D20MX is deployed in the presence of strong RF energy in the 110 MHz - 125 MHz
band, such as airport ILS localizers or aviation radio transmitters, it is recommended that
shielded twisted-pair Ethernet cables be used.
Table 14: Ethernet RJ-45 connector signal definitions
Position
Function
Signal Flow
Color
1
RX+
IN
White w/ Orange
2
RX-
IN
Orange
3
TX+
OUT
White w/ Green
4
P1+
-
Blue
5
P1-
-
White w/ Blue
6
TX-
OUT
Green
7
P2+
-
White w/ Brown
8
P2-
-
Brown
Shield
-
-
Table 15: Ethernet crossover cable (RJ-45) pin out
D20MX
60
Switch/Hub
Name
Pin
Pin
Name
TX_D1+
1
3
RX_D2+
TX_D1-
2
6
RX_D2-
RX_D2+
3
1
TX_D1+
RX_D2-
4
2
TX_D1-
BI_D3+
5
7
BI_D4+
BI_D3-
6
8
BI_D4-
BI_D4+
7
4
BI_D3+
BI_D4-
8
5
BI_D3-
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
Table 16: Ethernet straight-through cable (RJ-45) pin 0ut
D20MX
PC
Name
Pin
Pin
Name
TX_D1+
1
1
RX_D2+
TX_D1-
2
2
RX_D2-
RX_D2+
3
3
TX_D1+
RX_D2-
4
4
TX_D1-
BI_D3+
5
5
BI_D4+
BI_D3-
6
6
BI_D4-
BI_D4+
7
7
BI_D3+
BI_D4-
8
8
BI_D3-
Fiber optic Ethernet (for 526-3003 and 526-3005LF
only)
The 100BASE-FX variant of the D20MX (GE part numbers 526-3003 and 526-3005) can
connect to one or two networks through two fiber-optic Ethernet connections.
The data rate on each port is 100 Mbps.
You must enable Far End Fault Indication (FEFI) or Loss Link Alert (LLA) in connected
external devices for proper redundant operation.
NOTE
External switches must have Spanning Tree Protocol port settings configured to edge for
proper operation of 100Base-FX connected ports.
NOTE
You can use the following glass optical fiber (GOF) cabling with the D20MX:
•
50/125 μm core/cladding multi-mode (gradient index) cable
•
62.5/125 μm core cladding multi-mode (gradient index) cable
•
100/140 μm core/cladding multi-mode (gradient index) cable
•
200 m core Hard-Clad Silica (HCS) multi-mode (step index) cable
You can use the following fiber optic terminations for D20MX cabling:
•
ST Connectors (with 526-3003 and 526-3005LF + 526-3104LF fiber card)
•
LC connectors (with 526-3005LF + 526-3103LF fiber card)
When calculating cable length, consider the following optical power levels:
•
Glass optical fiber transmitter power is –19.0 ± 2 dBm
•
Glass optical fiber receiver sensitivity is typically –25.4 dBm
This product contains components rated as Class 1 Laser Products.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
61
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
LAN redundancy
Both twisted-pair and fiber optic Ethernet options provide two LAN redundancy schemes
called redundant LAN and dual LAN.
The redundant LAN scheme provides automated fail over between two Ethernet network
connections (TX1/RX1 and TX2/RX2) that share a single MAC address.
When the primary port (that is, port 1) receives no signal, or detects a fault signal from the
remote link partner, the D20MX switches to the secondary port (that is, port 2) if it has a
valid link. The D20MX reverts to the primary port if the primary link is restored or no signal
is present on the secondary port.
With the dual LAN scheme, each port has a unique MAC, IP address and subnet. Each
remote device participating in a dual LAN scheme must have a main IP address reachable
through the LAN A subnet of the D20MX and a backup IP address reachable through the
LAN B subnet of the D20MX. D20MX client applications fail over to the remote device's
backup IP address when they detect a failure to communicate with the remote device's
main IP address. D20MX server applications accept communications from the remote
device's main or backup IP address.
To configure a device for redundant LAN operation, enable only LAN A in the device
properties of the D20MX. To configure a device for redundant LAN operation with an Alias
IP, enable both LAN A and LAN B in the device properties of the D20MX and set the
“Redundancy” field in the B119-1N LAN Redundancy Manager > LRM Configuration table
to “Redundant LAN”. An Alias IP allows the D20MX to communicate with devices using the
dual LAN scheme and devices using the redundant LAN scheme, simultaneously.
To configure a device for dual LAN operation, enable both LAN A and LAN B in the device
properties of the D20MX and set the “Redundancy” field in B119-1N LAN Redundancy
Manager > LRM Configuration table to “Dual LAN”. The D20MX device properties and the
B119-1N LAN Redundancy Manager configuration may be configured through SGConfig
8.1 and higher.
62
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
IP addresses
The D20MX assigns IP configuration to its LAN A and optionally LAN B interface according
to the rules defined in Table 17.
In a standalone system, the D20MX assigns the LAN A and LAN B IP addresses exactly as
you configured them in SGConfig.
In a redundant system, the D20MX assigns the LAN A and LAN B IP addresses of the Active
CCU exactly as you configured them in SGConfig.
However, in other modes, the CCU assigns derived IP addresses as indicated in Table 17.
For a description of the modes, refer to Table 19. The D20MX assigns the subnet mask of
the derived IP addresses as the subnet mask configured in the LAN A or LAN B
configuration.
Table 17: D20MX IP address assignment
CCU
Redundant
System
Mode
LAN A IP Configuration
LAN B IP Configuration (If
Configured)
CCU A
Standalone
Active, Debug
or Disabled
CCU A
Redundant
Active
CCU B
Redundant
Active
IP Address: LAN A IP
Address
Mask: LAN A Subnet Mask
(e.g 192.168.1.1 /
255.255.255.0)
IP Address: LAN B IP
Address
Mask: Configured LAN B
Subnet Mask (e.g.
192.168.2.1 / 255.255.255.0)
CCU A
Redundant
Standby,
Debug or
Disabled.
Derived IP Address: LAN A
IP Address + 1
Mask: LAN A subnet mask
(e.g. 192.168.1.2 /
255.255.255.0)
Derived IP Address: LAN B
IP Address + 1
Mask: LAN B subnet mask
(e.g. 192.168.2.2 /
255.255.255.0)
CCU B
Redundant
Standby,
Debug or
Disabled.
Derived IP Address: LAN A
IP Address + 2
Mask: LAN A subnet mask
(e.g. 192.168.1.3 /
255.255.255.0)
Derived IP Address: LAN B
IP Address + 2
Mask: LAN B subnet mask
(e.g. 192.168.2.3 /
255.255.255.0)
Not enabled
Not enabled
CCU A/B Redundant or Service Mode
Standalone
You may override or disable the derived IP address by defining a host with the desired IP
address. Use an IP address of 0.0.0.0 to disable the derived IP address. Define the host in
the SGConfig tool > D20MX Device Wizard > Define the LAN properties for this project
screen (see Figure 36 for an example).
NOTE
When transferring a redundant D20 in a ConfigPro or SGConfig project configuration to a
D20MX ensure the new D20MX standby IP addresses do not conflict with other devices in
the project or the secondary IP addresses defined in the B119-1N LAN Redundancy
Manager application. For details on secondary IP addresses, refer to section “Transferring
a D200 configuration containing network applications on node 2+” on page 99. If they do,
you may disable the standby IP addresses or reassign them as described in the previous
paragraph. If there are any conflicts, the WESMAINT error log of the D20MX will log
warnings such as the following:
1 ROOT N0: W001: IP of RDT1 same as CCUB
where RDT1 is the host name of the device with a conflicting IP address.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
63
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
Figure 36: SGConfig - example of overriding derived IP address by defining a hostname
Each host consists of a host name and host address. Construct the host name by replacing
the last two characters of the D20MX Host Name with a two character suffix that matches
the derived IP address you wish to override or disable. The suffix conventions are shown in
Table 18. The D20MX Host Name appears in the D20MX Device Wizard as shown in
Figure 37.
Figure 37: SGConfig - Host name shown in the LAN Settings
64
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
Table 18: Host name suffix conventions
HostName Suffix
IP Address Corresponds To...
Example
AA
CCU A, LAN A
FAC_DEFAA
AB
CCU A, LAN B
FAC_DEFAB
BA
CCU B, LAN A
FAC_DEFBA
BB
CCU B, LAN B
FAC_DEFBB
The D20MX can be in one of five modes as defined in Table 19. You can find the current
mode of the D20MX by navigating to the SHELL in WESMAINT II+ and typing the
command el.
Table 19: System mode definitions
Mode
Description
Partial “el” output
Active
D20MX applications are operational.
Active CCU
Standby
D20MX applications are not operational but are Standby CCU
ready to take over on a switchover command or
a failover.
YES
Disabled
D20MX applications have been suspended due
to an error. You must type el /r and boot in the
SHELL to clear this error.
Disabled
YES
Debug
D20MX boot sequence has been interrupted by
pressing CTRL-E. Put the CCU into this mode in
order to recover a system that has a corrupted
configuration or code image.
Redundant CCU
Standby CCU
Active CCU
Service Mode
Sys Service Mode
Disabled
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Service Mode
D20MX configuration has been corrupted or is in Service Mode
the process of receiving a new configuration. To
recover the system, you must download a
configuration serially.
YES
YES
RS-232
The RS-232 port on the D20MX is used to access the WESMAINT II+ facility and to transfer
code and configuration data to the D20MX. You can use a VT100-compatible terminal or
terminal emulation program to directly access the WESMAINT II+ facility. SGConfig's
Terminal Emulator is an example of a suitable terminal emulation program.
For convenience the RS-232 port (COM0) is connected to the D20MX front panel and to the
rear panel. Only one port can be connected to at a single time, since both connectors are
internally connected to a single UART.
The D20MX can be ordered from the factory with either 9600 or 19200 bps. To change the
baud rate of the RS-232 port to 19200, type JBAUD 19200 in the D20M SHELL. To change
the baud rate to 9600 type JBAUD 9600 in the D20M SHELL.
Only a single connection at one time can be made to either the front panel RS-232 port or
to the rear panel WESMAINT port.
Connecting to both the front panel RS-232 port and the rear panel WESMAINT port at the
same time potentially results in faulty system operation and damage to the D20MX and
the connected computer.
JBAUD requires that you login as a user whose “Monitor Access Level” is Read/Write (i.e.,
Administrator role).
NOTE
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
65
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
Non-responsive
RS-232 port
In the event that the D20MX RS-232 port appears non-responsive, type Ctrl-Q. This nonresponsive condition might occur if your computer goes into sleep mode and then wakes
up while still connected to the D20MX RS-232 port.
Use only a NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) when you are
connecting to the D20MX front-panel RS-232 connector. Use of a WESMAINT cable does
not allow communication to the D20MX.
Use only a standard WESMAINT cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0300) when
connecting to the rear panel COM0 connector. Use of a NULL modem cable causes
permanent damage to the D20MX and PC.
D20 Gateway system redundancy
A redundant D20 setup allows a secondary D20 to automatically take over operations
from a paired D20 unit that has failed.
D20 equipment redundancy requires:
•
Two D20 units and
•
One or two RS-232 switch panels.
The quiescent current of the +12 V power supply input on the RS-232 Switch Panel is 15
mA. The maximum power requirement on the +12 V input during operation is 230 mA.
NOTE
Through a toggle switch on the RS-232 Switch Panel, you designate one of the CCUs as the
Active unit. If the Active unit hardware or software fails, the Active CCU is automatically
switched offline, and the Standby unit is switched through to the field equipment (i.e., it is
made Active).
The RS-232 Switch Panel is not equipped with EMI protection circuitry. If the connection
length exceeds 3m, a Serial Surge Protection Panel (GE item number 540-0249) or
equivalent protection device should be installed.
Figure 38 shows a redundant D20 system, with CCU A active.
Figure 38: Redundant D20 system with CCU A active
To Field Equipment
RS-232 Switch Panel
CCU A Serial
Communications
RS-232 Switch
Monitor and Control
CCU A
(Active)
CCU B Serial
Communications
CCU B
(Standby)
Inter-CCU
Communications
66
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
If the Active CCU fails:
•
The Standby CCU detects the failure through the inter-CCU communications link.
•
The Standby CCU commands the RS-232 Switch Panel to switch over all serial
connections.
•
The RS-232 Switch Panel switches all serial field connections to the Standby CCU,
which now becomes the Active CCU.
If CCU A fails, CCU B becomes active. See Figure 39, “Redundant D20 system - If CCU A
fails”.
Figure 39: Redundant D20 system - If CCU A fails
To Field Equipment
RS-232 Switch Panel
CCU A Serial
Communications
CCU B Serial
Communications
RS-232 Switch
Monitor and Control
CCU A
(F ailed)
CCU B
(Active)
Inter-CCU
Communications
Figure 40: RS-232 Switch panel
Power Indicator LEDs
PWR A
PWR B
CCU A
CCU B
Activ e/Standby Sw itch
CCU Indicator LEDs
A pair of LEDs marked CCU A and CCU B indicate which of the D20 units is currently active.
If the hardware or software of the active unit fails, it is automatically switched offline and
serial connections to the field are transferred to the standby unit. A toggle switch on the
RS-232 switch panel can be used to switch the D20 devices between active and standby
modes.
Failover sequence
If the active D20 unit fails, the following actions occur:
1.
The standby D20 unit detects the failure through the lack of a heartbeat signal on the
ping cable or through a status change on the watchdog cable.
2.
The standby D20 unit attempts to pull the RS-232 switch panel to assume the active
state.
3.
The RS-232 switch panel transfers all serial field connections to the standby D20,
which then becomes the active D20.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
67
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
Required components
To implement a redundant D20 system, you need the components: listed in Table 20.
Table 20: Redundant D20 system - required components
NOTE
To set up a redundant
system
Component
Function
Part Number
RS-232 Switch Panel
Communications switch.
517-0247
Power Supply
Power supply to power the RS-232 switch panel.
Input: 85 – 264 V AC or 90 – 350 V DC.
580-0046
Watchdog Cable
Assembly
Connects D20 A to the RS-232 switch panel.
977-0160
Connects D20 B to the RS-232 switch panel.
977-0160
Ping Cable Assembly
Links both D20 units to facilitate a heartbeat message
that determines the status of the active unit.
977-0122
RS-232 Serial Cable
Connects the D20 to the RS-232 switch panel which is
then connected to external field devices.
977-0121
Power/SysFail Cable
Connects the RS-232 switch panel to D20 external power
supply.
970-0161
Ground Cable
Provides a ground connection for the RS-232 switch panel. 970-0182
Pins 4 on switch panel connectors J2 through J9 are tied together and to the panel’s power
supply. Any loading from field devices on these pins, loads the RS-232 panel power supply
and should be taken into consideration when sizing power supplies.
It is recommended that you install and configure one standalone D20 unit to ensure that
your configuration is valid and that device communications are operating properly. Once
this is done, proceed with the installation of the redundant system.
1.
Mount the D20 devices in a rack and connect power and ground.
2.
Mount the RS-232 switch panel.
3.
Plug the connector of watchdog cable A (GE part number 977-0160) to serial
connector COM 6 on the first D20 (CCU A).
4.
Connect the bare leads of watchdog cable A to TB1 (position 1 and 6-8) on the RS-232
switch panel.
5.
Plug the connector of watchdog cable B (GE part number 977-0160) to serial
connector COM 6 on the second D20 (CCU B).
6.
Connect the bare leads of watchdog cable B to TB1 (position 11 and 14-16) on the RS232 switch panel.
7.
Connect one end of the ping cable to the first D20 and the other end to the second
D20. This ping cable must be connected to the same serial port number on both units.
8.
Use standard RS-232 cables (GE part number 977-0121) to connect the D20 serial
communication ports to the serial ports on the RS-232 switch panel. P1 through P8 are
connected to the first D20, P9 through P16 are connected to the second D20.
Connections from the switch panel to both D20 units should be made in the same
order. For example, if P1 is connected to port 3 on the first D20, P9 should also be
connected to port 3 on the second D20.
At least one RS232 cable (GE part number 977-0121) from each D20MX MUST be
connected to the switch panel to enable proper switch over operation. Failure to do so
may result in the D20MX entering the “disabled” mode during a failover.
NOTE
9.
68
Connect field devices to J1 through J8 on the RS-232 switch panel.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
RS-232 switch panel operation
The RS2-32 switch panel has two sets of indicator LEDs:
•
PWR A/PWR B: When lit, power and communications are received from the connected
units. Normally, both LEDs are lit.
•
CCU A/CCU B: Normally, one LED is lit, indicating which unit is active.
The active/standby switch on the front of the RS-232 switch panel is used to:
To manually operate
the RS-232 switch
panel
•
Restore a previously failed unit to active status once it has been repaired.
•
Manually force a unit to active status so that routine maintenance can be performed
on the other unit.
1.
Pull the active/standby switch straight out to release it from the locked position.
2. Switch it up to make unit A active or down to make unit B active.
The CCU A/CCU B LED indicator indicates which unit has been activated.
Redundancy wiring diagrams
Figure 41 illustrates how to wire the D20MX units and RS-232 switch panels to enable
system redundancy:
The D20MX watchdog (control) port, heartbeat (ping) port, and serial port assignments are
software configurable. Refer to the D2x Configuration Guides.
NOTE
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
69
CHAPTER 4: CONNECTING TO DEVICES AND NETWORKS
Figure 41: Redundancy wiring - single RS-232 switch panel
7R'0;$
3LQJ3RUW
3RZHU6XSSO\$
*(SDUWQR
²9$&RU²9'&
²9'&:
7R'0;$
6\V)DLO7%
3RZHU6XSSO\%
2SWLRQDO
*(SDUWQR
²9$&RU²9'&
²9'&:
&DEOHSDUWQR
:KLWH
5HG
%ODFN
*UHHQ
:KLWH
5HG
%ODFN
*UHHQ
96RXUFH$
7%
96RXUFH$
96RXUFH$
6HW$,Q
6HW$2XW
6HW$
6HW$
96RXUFH%
6WDWXV$
96RXUFH%
96RXUFH%
6HW%,Q
6HW%2XW
6HW%
6HW%
6WDWXV%
&DEOHSDUWQR
*UHHQ<HOORZ$:*
1RWXVHG
7%
=
7%
7%
1RWXVHG
5HVHW
&DEOHDVVHPEO\
SDUWQR
7R'0;%
3LQJ3RUW
7R'0;%
6\V)DLO7%
&DEOHSDUWQR
&DEOHDVVHPEO\
SDUWQR
&DEOHDVVHPEO\
SDUWQR
6HW
5HVHW
6HW
=
'HYLFH
6HULDO3RUW
'HYLFH
6HULDO3RUW
'HYLFH
6HULDO3RUW
3
-
3
3
-
3
3
-
3
7R'0;$
6HULDO3RUW
7R'0;%
6HULDO3RUW
7R'0;$
6HULDO3RUW
7R'0;%
6HULDO3RUW
7R'0;$
6HULDO3RUW
7R'0;%
6HULDO3RUW
&DEOHDVVHPEO\
SDUWQR
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
70
7R'0;$
&RQWURO3RUW
56
7R'0;%
&RQWURO3RUW
56
*1'
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 5: Powering-up and Testing
a D20 Substation Controller
Powering-up and Testing a D20 Substation Controller
Once you have made all field wiring and communication connections and have completed
the necessary hardware configuration, the next step is to power-up the D20MX and verify
that it is functioning properly.
Use this chapter to prepare for and correctly perform the power-up and other tests. This
chapter includes:
NOTE
•
What is needed to test: WESMAINT II+ facility, SHELL and SGConfig
•
How to power-up the D20MX and conduct the BOOT Test: Power On Self-Test
•
How to carry out a redundant system test
Before any of the tests and procedures in this section can be performed, a valid
configuration file must be loaded into the D20MX NVRAM.
If you have replaced the main board of the D20MX, then you need to restore the
configuration file so that diagnostic tests can be performed.
If this power-up and test procedure reveals that your D20MX is not functioning properly
due to software malfunction, then you need to download code and configuration files.
See the SGConfig online help.
Required for testing
The system components that are required for configuring and testing the D20MX are:
•
WESMAINT II+ facility
•
SHELL
•
SGConfig application
To prevent burning out the main processor board, make two important checks before
switching on the D20MX:
•
Check that the external power supply input level is correct for the Power Supply fitted
to the chassis. See section: “D20 power supply” on page 26.
•
If you have 125 V DC or 110V AC input, then jumpers Z22 and Z23 on the WESTERM
D20M+: 517 - 0225 or 517 - 0224 must be jumpered 2 - 3.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
71
CHAPTER 5: POWERING-UP AND TESTING A D20 SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
Accessing WESMAINT II+ using a terminal
You can use a VT100-compatible terminal or a terminal emulation program to directly
access the WESMAINT II+ facility. SGConfig's Terminal Emulator is an example of a suitable
terminal emulation program.
For further information about using WESMAINT II+ software to perform any of the test
procedures in this section, refer to the WESMAINT II+ User’s Guide.
NOTE
Terminal Emulation
Microsoft Windows™ HyperTerminal can be used for terminal emulation but it is NOT
recommended because code and configuration file download times are considerably
increased.
TIP
The program Tera Term for Microsoft Windows™ does not have these limitations and is
therefore recommended as a terminal emulation program. It can be downloaded from the
Internet.
SHELL
The SHELL is a debugging and diagnostics tool that is accessible as a menu selection in
WESMAINT II+, or from a basic login prompt if WESMAINT II+ is not available.
The approved method of using the diagnostic tools of the SHELL is through the front RS232
port.
Power up and test steps
To power up and test the D20MX:
1.
“Set up a PC to act as a WESMAINTII+ terminal”. See page 73.
2.
“Power up the D20MX” on page 73. See page 73.
Result: The D20MX automatically runs the Online Start-up test. See “Automatic on-line
start-up test” on page 73.
72
3.
“Test for redundancy”. See page 74.
4.
“Check that fail-over is functioning correctly”. See page 75.
5.
“Check that switch-over is functioning correctly”. See page 75.
6.
“Verify either hardware or software switch-over”. See page 76.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: POWERING-UP AND TESTING A D20 SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
Set up a PC to act as a WESMAINTII+ terminal
To set up a PC to act
as a WESMAINT II+
terminal.
1.
Open the VT100 compatible terminal emulation software you are going to use.
2.
Verify (or set) terminal communications settings as follows:
Setting
Value
Data Rate
Baud rate of the D20MX (9600 or 19200 bps - See “RS-232” on
page 65 to change)
Data Bits
8
Stop Bits
1
Parity
None
Flow Control
Xon/Xoff (software)
Connector Settings
COM1 or COM2, as required by the computer you are using
Result: The terminal emulator settings are now configured.
Power up the D20MX
To power up the
D20MX
1.
Check that all field wiring, grounding wires and fuses are in place and secure on your
D20 device.
2.
Turn the chassis-mounted Power Supply switch to ON.
Result: The unit is powered-up.
3.
On start-up, inspect the D20MX LED indicators on the front panel.
Result: The RDY LED is flashing.
Automatic on-line start-up test
The D20MX automatically boots up when the power is switched on. Internal processes
perform a series of routines. Self-diagnostic tests are performed followed by the spawning
of all the software applications that reside in the unit's memory.
The self-diagnostic tests generate PASS or FAIL messages that can be viewed in your
terminal emulator WESMAINT II+ screen. You can also see the results of the application
spawning process.
Pass/Fail tests are carried out on the:
•
User RAM
•
NVRAM
•
FLASH memory
•
Root process
The self-diagnostics also return measures for:
•
SDRAM size
•
Bus Speeds
•
CPU Core Speed
The NVRAM CRC test verifies that the configuration header is valid. If this fails, then the
D20MX starts with a minimal set of applications that allow the device to be restored.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
73
CHAPTER 5: POWERING-UP AND TESTING A D20 SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
Code and configuration files
If the code and configuration files compiled for your specific device are already
downloaded, then you can login straightaway to WESMAINT II+ for powering-up and
testing.
If your device-specific code and configuration files are not downloaded, then you need to
power-up with the default configuration. You can then login to the SHELL, download your
device-specific files and restart the D20MX for testing.
For details, see the SGConfig online help.
Further testing
For further specific testing, log in to WESMAINT II+. See the WESMAINT II+ Users Guide and
WESMAINT user guides for specific applications.
Test for redundancy
If you have a D20 redundant system, you must test that:
•
CCU A and CCU B are communicating
•
Fail-over is functioning correctly.
To check that CCU A and CCU B are communicating once you have powered-up the
Primary and Secondary units:
1.
On the front of the RS-232 Panel, check that CCU A LED is illuminated, which shows
that CCU A is Active.
Both the PWR A and PWR B LEDs should be illuminated.
NOTE
2.
Connect a NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) to the RS232 connector on the front panel of the active D20MX.
3.
Attach the other end of the cable to the serial communications port of the PC or
terminal.
4.
Login to WESMAINT II+ through the emulator you are using.
Result: The WESMAINT Main Menu appears.
5.
Check to see that STNDBY appears at the top-left of this WESMAINT screen.
Results: If this text shows, then the Primary and Secondary CCU are communicating.
If this text does not show, then the Primary and Secondary are not communicating.
NOTE
74
STNDBY appears on the Active CCU WESMAINT Main Menu display approximately one
minute after power-up of the two units. Wait for this message to appear before following
the next procedure.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: POWERING-UP AND TESTING A D20 SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
Check that fail-over is functioning correctly
To check that fail-over is functioning correctly for the event of hardware failure:
1.
On the front of the RS-232 Panel, check that CCU A LED is illuminated, which shows
that CCU A is Active.
Both the PWR A and PWR B LEDs should be illuminated.
NOTE
2.
To simulate hardware failure, switch off the Active D20MX at the main power switch
on the front of the unit.
Result: If the RS-232 is functioning correctly, then it switches over to the Standby unit
and the CCU B LED illuminates and the CCU A LED goes off.
Check that switch-over is functioning correctly
To check that switch-over is functioning correctly for the event of software failure:
1.
On the front of the RS-232 Panel, check that CCU A LED is illuminated, which shows
that CCU A is Active.
Both the PWR A and PWR B LEDs should be illuminated.
NOTE
2.
Connect a NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) to the RS232 connector on the front panel of the D20MX designated as CCU A.
3.
Attach the other end of the cable to the serial communications port of the PC or
terminal.
4.
Login to WESMAINT II+ on CCU A using your terminal emulator.
5.
Select Main Menu > System Functions and press ENTER.
Result: The WESMAINT Main Menu appears.
Result: The WESMAINT Function Menu appears.
6.
Select SWITCH-OVER on the Function Menu and press ENTER.
Result: A password prompt appears.
7.
Enter your password and press ENTER. The default password is control.
8.
Press Ctrl-V to begin switch-over.
9.
Type Yes and press ENTER.
Result: The CCU Switch-Over display appears.
Result: A confirmation message appears: Confirm Yes/No.
Result: Fail over occurs
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
75
CHAPTER 5: POWERING-UP AND TESTING A D20 SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
Verify either hardware or software switch-over
To verify either hardware or software switch-over.
1.
Connect a NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) to the RS232 connector on the front panel of the D20MX designated as CCU B, which was
originally the Standby unit.
2.
Attach the other end of the cable to the serial communications port of the PC or
terminal.
3.
Login to WESMAINT II+ through the emulator you are using.
4.
If you can login to WESMAINT II+, this indicates that CCU B is the Active CCU.
Result: The WESMAINT Main Menu appears.
Results: Fail over has occurred.
NOTE
If the previously Active A CCU powers-up after a fail-over from CCU A to CCU B, then
STNDBY appears at top left when you login to WESMAINT II+ on CCU B. This can take
up to a minute to occur.
If you cannot login to WESMAINT II+ on a CCU, then the unit is most likely powered down.
Verify that the RDY LED is flashing and verify that the serial cable is connected correctly.
NOTE
76
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 6: Configuring the Software
Configuring the Software
This chapter provides:
•
An introduction to the software components used in the D20MX
•
Technical Support shell access
•
D20MX User Accounts
•
How to download image files to the Flash memory on your D20MX module on your
device using a serial or network connection
•
How to download a Hardware Support Package to the D20MX
•
How to transfer D20 configurations to the D20MX
•
How to update D20 configurations to use the D20MX firmware definition
•
Software (feature) licensing
•
How to configure serial expansion
Introduction to the D20MX software
The D20MX main processor board requires four valid files to be loaded:
•
An operating system image file, called “vxWorks”, which resides in the file system on
Flash memory
•
An application image file, called “appl.out”, which resides in the file system on Flash
memory
•
A configuration file which resides in the NVRAM
•
A Hardware Support Package (HSP) file, called “hsp.tar”, that resides in the file system
on Flash memory.
Use this section to load the above files into your RTU device.
Image file terms
The following terms are used throughout this chapter of the manual when referring to the
image files:
•
Collectively the files vxWorks and appl.out are to be referred to as “image files”
•
vxWorks refers to the “operating system image file”
•
appl.out refers to the “application image file”
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
77
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Hardware Support
Package
The HSP is a collection of low level firmware files that provide boot loading support and
low level hardware functionality defined by Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA)
configuration information. The boot loading support consists of the JMON and Bootrom
files. The HSP also includes an Emergency Recovery Image (ERI) that runs only during the
HSP upgrade procedure to program the FPGAs.
There are two HSP files with the V1.5x release: one for each of the baud rates supported by
the console port of the D20MX (i.e., 9600 and 19200 baud). The name of the HSP file
indicates the baud rate of the console port and the version of the release. For example:
hsp_v140_9600.tar is the v1.40 HSP release for a 9600 baud console port.
Technical Support shell access
In certain cases, GE Technical Support may require access to a low-level shell called the “C”
shell in the D20MX in order to troubleshoot a problem. The “C” shell is accessible from the
D20M shell by typing c. To leave the shell, type exit.
The “C” shell can only be accessed from an RS232 port of the D20MX, and it must be
enabled by a user whose “Monitor Access Level” is Read/Write (i.e., Administrator role).
Once the “C” shell is enabled, only a user whose “Monitor Access Level” is Maintenance (i.e.,
Engineer role) or Read/Write is able to access the “C” shell.
“C” shell access is enabled by typing eds in the D20M shell. The eds command takes a
parameter which defines how many seconds that a user is allowed to enter the “C” shell.
Until the eds timer expires, a user with appropriate access is allowed to enter or re-enter
the “C” shell as many times as required. After the eds timer expires, entry to the “C” shell is
no longer allowed. If the parameter is not specified, the default timeout is 300 seconds
(5 minutes).
A user log is generated each time a user runs the eds command or enters the “C” shell.
D20MX user accounts
The D20MX supports the following types of user accounts:
•
Remote and local user accounts
•
Factory default user account
•
System default user account
Remote and local user accounts
The D20MX supports remote and local user accounts. Use remote user accounts whenever
possible to increase the level of security and to decrease user administration effort. To
implement remote user accounts, the D20MX uses Remote Authentication Dial-In User
Service (RADIUS) with CHAP, EAP-TTLS and PEAP authentication methods. Refer to the
B014-1NCG WESMAINT II+ for the D20MX Configuration Guide for details on how to
configure the D20MX to use RADIUS.
When RADIUS is used, your RADIUS server provides a role ID to the D20MX. The role ID
defines which commands and displays the user is allowed to access while logged in to the
D20MX. To allow your RADIUS server to provide a role ID, configure your RADIUS server to
use the GE vendor profile that is common to many Multilin products. Refer to the B0141NCG WESMAINT II+ for the D20MX Configuration Guide for details on how to configure
78
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
your RADIUS server and the D20MX with the GE vendor profile. Also refer to Appendix A,
Default Role-Based Access Control Model for the default role based access control model
provided with the D20MX default configurations.
In the event all configured RADIUS servers are down or if RADIUS is not configured, the
D20MX authenticates the user against the local configuration and password file. Local
users are created with a default password of changeme. Use the passwd command from
the D20MX SHELL prompt to change the default password to a strong password as soon
as possible after downloading the configuration. Refer to the B014-1NCG WESMAINT II+
for the D20MX Configuration Guide for details on how to configure local user accounts and
change the password of a user.
Factory default user account
The factory default configurations for the D20MX come with one default user account with:
•
username: admin
•
password: changeme
Replace this account or change the password for this account as soon as possible. Refer to
the B014-1NCG WESMAINT II+ for the D20MX Configuration Guide for details on how to
modify user accounts and how to change the password of a user.
System default user account
The D20MX configuration can be defaulted by pressing CTRL-F on a terminal connected
over the front RS232 port during startup. In addition, if the D20MX detects a corrupt
configuration on startup, it generates a system default configuration. The system default
configuration comes with one user account:
• username: recover
• password: system
Login with this username and synchronize a configuration to the D20MX over the front
RS232 port.
The D20MX can only be accessed over the front RS232 port with the system default
configuration.
NOTE
If you synchronize a configuration with any of the following errors:
•
There are no usernames configured in the B014 User table,
•
The B014 User table is disabled, or
•
The B014 application definition does not match the firmware version,
then the applications do not start and you only have serial access in debug mode.
Login with the system default username over the front RS232 port and synchronize a
correct configuration.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
79
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Download image files to the D20MX
When to download
Instances where you may need to download an operating system or application image file
to your D20MX:
•
When a new version of the operating system or application image has been released.
•
If the D20MX has performed self-diagnostics and determined that the application
image file is either missing or corrupted.
•
After maintenance or replacement work that has deleted the application file.
Prerequisites for image download
The following items must be available before an application or operating system image file
can be loaded into a D20MX over a serial or network link:
•
Windows PC with SGConfig version 8.1 and higher software.
•
The application firmware file, preferably located on a local hard drive.
This file is to be named: appl.out.
•
The operating system image file, preferably located on a local hard drive.
This file is to be named: vxWorks.
•
The D20MX module must be installed into a D20 chassis, ready to power-up.
Prerequisite for image
download over a
serial link
The following item must be available before an application and operating system image
file can be loaded into a D20MX over a serial link:
Prerequisite for image
download over a
network link
The following items must be available before an application and operating system image
file can be loaded into a D20MX over the network:
•
A NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) connecting the RS232 connector on the front panel of the D20MX to the serial communications port of a
PC or terminal.
•
An Ethernet switch and appropriate Ethernet patch cables to connect your PC's
Network Adapter and the D20MX's Ethernet port 1 to the switch.
•
The D20MX contains a configuration file with LAN enabled and an IP address that
matches the one configured in SGConfig.
•
The PC's Network Adapter is configured with an IP address on the same network as
the IP address of the D20MX.
Download software over a serial connection
To download software to the D20MX:
1.
Set up Tera Term on a PC. See section: “Set up Tera Term on a PC” on page 80.
2.
Download application image file to the D20MX over a serial connection. See section:
“Download image files to the D20MX over a serial link” on page 81.
This comprises:
80
–
Application files
–
Operating system files
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Set up Tera Term on a
PC
To set up the Tera Term on a PC:
1.
Connect a NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) from the RS232 connector on the front panel of the D20MX to the serial communications port of
the PC or terminal.
2.
Start SGConfig.
Result: The Welcome to SGConfig screen appears.
3.
Open a project containing a D20MX device.
4.
Click on a D20MX device.
Result: The project's Main Page appears.
Result: The ribbon changes to include the Communications group.
5.
Click Configure ribbon group > Communications > Connect drop-down list > Tera
Term.
Result: Tera Term: New connection dialog appears
6.
Click Serial and select the communications port on your PC from the Port drop-down
list.
7.
Click OK.
Result: Tera Term: New connection dialog closes
Result: The Tera Term VT window appears
8.
Select Setup > Serial port…
9.
Verify (or set) terminal communication settings as follows:
Result: Tera Term: Serial port setup dialog appears
Setting
Value
Port:
COM1 or COM2, or as required by the computer you are using.
Baud Rate
baud rate of the D20MX (9600 or 19200 bps)
See “RS-232” on page 65 if you need to change the baud rate.
Data
8 bit
Parity
none
Stop
1 bit
Flow Control
Xon/Xoff
Transmit delay
0 msec/char; 0 msec/line
10. Click OK.
Result: The Tera Term settings are now configured.
Download image files
to the D20MX over a
serial link
Note: For a redundant system, download image files to the standby D20MX first. Then
switch-over and download image files to the new standby D20MX.
To download application and operating system image files to a D20MX module:
1.
Restart the D20MX.
2.
When the message “Press Ctrl-E to enter debug mode” appears, press Ctrl-E within 3
seconds.
Result: The startup messages appear.
Result: The login dialog appears.
3.
Log in:
–
For User: type a username that has Maintenance or Read/Write Access and press
Enter,
–
For Password: type the password and press Enter.
Result: The D20M> prompt appears.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
81
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
4.
Optional: Speed-up communications to shorten download time.
Type Baud 115200 and press Enter.
Note: Select 57600 or 38400 if communications errors have occurred previously. Such
errors can occur due to the presence of ambient EMI, a long cable length, a PC with
communication limitations due to CPU speed or when using some serial to USB
adapters.
Result: The D20MX is now communicating at 115,200 baud.
5.
4.1.
Select Setup > Serial port…
Result: Tera Term: Serial port setup dialog appears.
4.2.
Select 115,200 from the Baud Rate drop-down list.
4.3.
Click OK.
Result: Tera Term main window appears and is communicating at 115,200
baud.
Download the application image file:
5.1.
Press Enter to verify that communication is active.
Result: The D20M> prompt appears if the connection is active.
5.2.
Type rz and press Enter to put the D20MX into the state where it is ready to
receive the downloadable code file
5.3.
Click File > Transfer > ZMODEM > Send from menu bar
Result: A dialog box opens, prompting you to locate the appl.out file that you
wish to download.
5.4.
Select the correct file, and click Open to start the transfer
Do not press any keys on keyboard and do not move the Tera Term window
during download.
Result: The file transfer may take from less than 10 to over 30 minutes,
depending on communication speed selected.
When complete, the D20M> prompt appears.
NOTE
6.
Download the operating system image file
6.1.
Press Enter to verify that communication is active.
Result: The D20M> prompt returns if connection is active
6.2.
Type rz and press Enter to put the D20MX into the state where it is ready to
receive the downloadable code file.
6.3.
Click File > ZMODEM > Send from menu bar.
Result: A dialog box appears, prompting you to locate the vxWorks file that you
wish to download.
6.4.
Select the correct file, and click Open to start the transfer
Do not press any keys on keyboard and do not move the Tera Term window
during download.
Result: The file transfer may take from less than 10 to over 30 minutes,
depending on communication speed selected.
When complete, the D20M> prompt appears.
NOTE
7.
Type al 0 to ensure the autologout timer does not interrupt the copy to flash.
8.
Type cf to copy the image files to flash.
Result: The copy may take a few minutes to complete. When complete, the D20M>
prompt appears.
9.
82
Type el /r to ensure that log is clear.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
10. Type boot to restart device.
Result: The image file load is completed.
The flash memory of the D20MX now has the new application and operating system
image file loaded.
Configuration File
Download
You can use standard SGConfig procedures to download a configuration file over the serial
port.
Download image files over a network connection
Procedure
To download application and operating system image files to the D20MX over a network
connection:
In the event that you have selected dialog checkbox “Do not show this message again”,
some of the following steps do not appear. Accordingly, ignore the affected steps.
NOTE
1.
Connect Ethernet port 1 of the D20MX to the Ethernet switch using the appropriate
Ethernet patch cable.
2.
Connect the PC's network adapter to the Ethernet switch using the appropriate
Ethernet patch cable.
3.
Start SGConfig.
Result: The Welcome to SGConfig screen appears.
4.
Open a project containing the target D20MX device.
Result: The project's Main Page appears.
5.
Click on the D20MX device.
6.
Click Configure ribbon group > Communications > Options.
7.
Click Interface tab > Connection Type > iSCS LAN and select the Preferred LAN you
wish to use, either LAN A or LAN B. This is most likely to be LAN A.
8.
Click OK.
9.
Click Edit ribbon group > Properties.
Result: The Communications group appears in the ribbon.
Result: D2x Device Communication Options dialog appears
Result: D2x Device Communication Options dialog closes.
Result: The D20MX Device Wizard appears
10. Click Next.
Result: The Project LAN properties appear.
11. Click Next.
Result: The hardware and other properties appear for the device.
12. Click Processor tab > Code Image sub-tab.
13. Click the button with the ellipsis (…).
Result: The Select Flash image file dialog appears.
14. Navigate to the folder containing the appl.out file and vxWorks file.
15. Select the appl.out file and click Open.
Result: The full pathname of the appl.out file appears in the Flash Image File box.
Note: To transfer the operating system image, simply ensure that a vxWorks file exists
in the same folder as the selected appl.out file. SGConfig automatically transfers both
files to the D20MX even though you only selected the appl.out file.
16. Click Next.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
83
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
17. Click Finish.
Result: The project's Main Page appears with the D20MX device selected.
18. Click the ribbon Configure group > Configuration > Generate.
19. Confirm that there are zero errors in the Device Log.
20. Click the ribbon Communications group > Firmware transfer.
Result: Warning message appears and confirmation to continue is requested.
21. Acknowledge the warning and click Yes to continue or No to abort the operation.
Result: If Yes is selected, then refer to the following table. If No is selected, the
operation is aborted.
Possible Result if Yes is Selected
When to expect this result
Go to step
Select Target IP Address dialog
appears
If the D20MX is configured for device
redundancy.
22
Login dialog appears
If the D20MX is not configured for device
redundancy.
24
22. Choose one of the following options:
–
If the default standby IP address is not the correct one, click the Standby IP
address checkbox and in the associated IP address field, enter the IP address of
the standby unit.
Tip: Click Help for information on how to determine the Standby IP address.
–
Click the Active IP address checkbox.
23. Click OK.
Result: A login dialog appears.
24. Enter a User Name that has Maintenance or Read/Write access. Enter the associated
Password.
Result: The firmware transfer takes place. A dialog indicating the transfer and reboot is
taking place is presented. The unit is rebooted once the transfer finishes. Once the
reboot completes, the dialog disappears. The whole operation can take up to 8
minutes.
The flash memory of the D20MX now has the new application and operating system
image file loaded.
25. If the D20MX was configured for device redundancy, you may switch over the D20MX
and repeat the above steps for the other unit.
Configuration file
download
You can use standard SGConfig procedures to download a configuration file over the
network.
Firmware integrity
The D20MX firmware uses a Firmware Integrity checking mechanism. This mechanism
consists of a Primary and Secondary storage system, internal to the D20MX, for the
firmware files and an MD5 checksum on the individual firmware files.
Two D20M Shell commands: commit and revert copy the firmware files from the Primary
storage to the Secondary (commit), or from the Secondary to the Primary (revert).
The D20MX determines which set of files (Primary or Secondary storage) to use when
starting up by:
84
1.
Testing the integrity of the D20MX firmware files in the Primary storage.
2.
If the integrity check of the Primary storage files is valid, the D20MX starts up with the
Primary storage files.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
3.
If the integrity check of the Primary storage files fails, the D20MX tests the integrity of
the firmware files in the Secondary.
4.
If the integrity of the Secondary storage files is valid, the D20MX starts up with
Secondary storage files.
5.
If the integrity of the Secondary storage files fails, the D20MX defaults to the Boot
ROM command prompt.
Committing new firmware
After new firmware has been downloaded (either via serial or network connection), and the
D20MX has restarted and is operating correctly, the firmware must be “committed” to the
secondary storage.
Once the new firmware is committed, you cannot revert to the old version of the firmware;
see Section: “Reverting to old firmware” on page 85.
To commit new firmware:
1.
Login as a user that has Maintenance or Read/Write access privileges.
2.
Enter the D20M Shell.
3.
Enter the commit command.
Result: A prompt appears to confirm copying the firmware from Primary to Secondary.
4.
Enter yes to confirm the copy operation. If anything else is entered, the command is
canceled.
Result: The firmware copy operation begins. Both 'vxworks' and 'appl.out' are copied.
This operation takes approximately 3 minutes.
DO NOT shut off the power to the D20MX while the copy operation is in progress. If power
to the D20MX is disrupted, during the copy operation, the firmware is likely to be corrupted.
If the D20MX is configured for device redundancy, perform this procedure on the standby
unit. Then if desired, switch over and perform this on the other unit.
Reverting to old firmware
A previously committed version of the firmware (i.e., old firmware) may be recovered from
secondary storage.
This feature is intended to be used if, after downloading a new version of the firmware, an
issue is identified and you wish to recover the previous version of the firmware. A revert is
only possible if the new firmware has not been committed; see Section: “Committing new
firmware” on page 84.
To revert the firmware:
1.
Login as a user that has Maintenance or Read/Write access privileges.
2.
Enter the D20M Shell.
3.
Enter the revert command
Result: A prompt appears to confirm copying the firmware from Secondary to Primary.
4.
Enter yes to confirm the copy operation. If anything else is entered, the command is
canceled.
Result: The firmware copy operation begins. Both 'vxworks' and 'appl.out' are copied.
This operation takes approximately 3 minutes.
DO NOT shut off the power to the D20MX while the copy operation is in progress. If power
to the D20MX is disrupted, during the copy operation, the firmware is likely to be corrupted.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
85
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
5.
Once the copy operation has completed, enter the boot command to restart the
D20MX with the reverted firmware.
Download hardware support package to the D20MX
When to download
Instances where you may need to download an HSP to your D20MX:
•
When a new version of the D20MX firmware and HSP is released. In this case, make
sure you upgrade the firmware first.
•
After upgrading the firmware and HSP, you may decide to downgrade to the previous
release. In this case, downgrade the HSP first.
Prerequisites for HSP download
The following items must be available before an HSP file can be loaded into a D20MX:
•
Windows PC with SGConfig version 8.2 and higher software.
•
D20MX Documentation CD (part number 588-0075 V1.5x) in either of the following
formats:
•
–
Physical CD media, or
–
Zip file
A NULL modem cable (GE part number 977-0529) connecting the RS-232 connector
on the front panel of the D20MX to the serial communications port of the PC.
In addition, the following additional prerequisites must be met:
•
You have local access to the D20MX because the last step of the procedure may
involve power cycling the D20MX.
•
You have taken precautions to ensure power will not be interrupted while you are
running this procedure.
•
You have allocated about 1 hour to perform the whole operation.
Prerequisites for HSP download over a network link
The following items must be available before an HSP file can be transferred into a D20MX
over the network:
•
An Ethernet switch and appropriate Ethernet patch cables to connect your PC's
Network Adapter and the D20MX's Ethernet port 1 to the switch.
•
The D20MX contains a configuration file with LAN enabled and an IP address that
matches the one configured in SGConfig.
•
The PC's Network Adapter is configured with an IP address on the same network as
the IP address of the D20MX.
Download HSP over a serial connection
To download an HSP file to the D20MX over a serial connection:
86
1.
Stage HSP file for SGConfig. See section: “Stage HSP File for SGConfig” on page 87
2.
Set up Tera Term on a PC. See section: “Set up Tera Term on a PC” on page 80.
3.
Stage HSP file for serial transfer. See section: “Stage HSP file for serial transfer” on
page 88
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
4.
Transfer HSP file to the D20MX over a serial connection. See section: “Transfer HSP file
to the D20MX over a serial link” on page 89
5.
Apply HSP. See section: “Apply HSP” on page 91.
6.
If the D20MX is configured for device redundancy, you may switch over the D20MX
and repeat the previous two steps for the other unit.
Download HSP over a network connection
To download an HSP file to the D20MX over a network connection:
1.
Stage HSP file for SGConfig. See section “Stage HSP File for SGConfig” on page 87.
2.
Transfer HSP file over a network connection. See section “Transfer HSP over a network
connection” on page 90
3.
Apply HSP. See section “Apply HSP” on page 91.
4.
If the D20MX is configured for device redundancy, you may switch over the D20MX
and repeat the previous 2 steps for the other unit.
Stage HSP File for SGConfig
1.
Press the Windows Key
and E at the same time
Result: The Windows Explorer window appears.
2.
Navigate to a folder to which you have write permissions.
Result: The content of the folder is displayed.
3.
Click the New folder button in Windows Explorer
Result: A new folder is created with the name “New folder” and the cursor is positioned
to allow renaming of the folder.
4.
Rename the folder (e.g., D20MX). This folder is called the staging folder in the
remaining steps of this procedure.
Result: The folder is renamed.
5.
Do either of the following:
– Insert the D20MX Documentation CD into the computer's DVD/CD drive, or
– Extract then CD zip file on to the root of your C: drive and double click the
readme.html file under the ISO-Image sub-folder, which is nested two levels
deep into the extracted folder.
Result: The Documentation CD home page appears in your default Web Browser.
Alternate result for “Insert the D20MX Documentation CD”: The home page does
not appear in your default Web Browser. In this case, navigate to the CD in
Windows Explorer, and double-click the readme.html file on the root of the CD.
6.
Click on the link named D20MX Firmware Files.
Result: The Firmware Files folder is displayed. It contains folders named HSP,
SAN0001.15X and SAN0002.15X.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
87
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
7.
Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the SAN0001.15X sub-folder under the Firmware
Files folder and copy/paste the files as shown in the following table.
To copy a file, select it and press Ctrl-C. To paste a file, click on the Windows Explorer
window showing the staging folder created in step 4 and press Ctrl-V.
Navigate to folder on D20MX Documentation CD
or Folder extracted from Zip File
Copy/Paste the following files to the
staging folder created in step 4
Firmware Files\SAN0001.15X
appl.out
VxWorks
Result: The Windows Explorer window showing the staging folder is displaying the files
shown in the above table.
8.
If you are upgrading the HSP, decide which baud rate you want COM0 to operate at,
and copy/paste one of the files as shown in the following table.
If the desired baud Navigate to folder on D20MX
rate for COM0 is ... Documentation CD or Folder
extracted from Zip File
Copy/Paste the following file to the
staging folder created in step 4
19200
Firmware Files\HSP
hsp_v15X_19200.tar
9600
Firmware Files\HSP
hsp_v15X_9600.tar
Result: The Windows Explorer window showing the staging folder is displaying one of
the tar files shown above.
9.
If you are downgrading the HSP, refer to the README.TXT file in the Firmware
Files\HSP\Archive folder to determine which HSP version was used in the original
firmware version. Then, copy/paste the corresponding file as shown in the following
table.
Navigate to folder on D20MX Documentation CD
or folder extracted from Zip file ...
Copy/Paste the following files to the
staging folder created in step 4
Firmware Files\HSP\Archive
hsp_v1XX_19200.tar or
hsp_V1XX_9600.tar
Result: The Windows Explorer window showing the staging folder is displaying one of
the tar files shown above.
10. Start SGConfig,
Result: The Welcome to SGConfig screen appears.
11. Open the project containing the configuration of the target D20MX device.
Result: The project's Main Page appears.
12. Select the target D20MX device and click the ribbon Configure group > Configuration
> Hardware.
Result: The D20MX Device Wizard appears
13. Click Processor tab > Code Image sub-tab. Click the button with the ellipsis (…).
Result: The Select Flash image file dialog appears.
14. Navigate to the staging folder created in step 4. Select the appl.out file and click Open.
Result: The full pathname of the appl.out file appears in the Flash Image File box.
15. Click OK.
Result: The project's Main Page appears with the D20MX device selected.
16. Generate the device configuration:
16.1. Click the Project tab for the D20MX device configuration.
16.2. Click the D20MX device.
16.3. Click the ribbon Configure group > Configuration > Generate.
88
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Stage HSP file for serial transfer
1.
Press the Windows Key
and E at the same time.
Result: The Windows Explorer window appears.
2.
Navigate to a folder to which you have write permissions.
Result: The content of the folder is displayed.
3.
Click the New folder button in Windows Explorer
Result: A new folder is created with the name “New folder” and the cursor is positioned
to allow renaming of the folder.
4.
Rename the folder (e.g., D20MXHSP). This folder is called the staging folder in the
remaining steps of this procedure.
Do not use the code image folder that you would select from SGConfig to contain
appl.out for a firmware transfer.
NOTE
Result: The folder is renamed.
5.
Do either of the following:
–
Insert the D20MX Documentation CD into the computer's DVD/CD drive, or
–
Extract the D20MX Documentation CD zip file on to the root of your C: drive and
double click the readme.html file under the ISO-Image sub-folder, which is
nested two levels deep into the extracted folder.
Result: The Documentation CD home page appears in your default Web Browser.
Alternate result for “Insert the D20MX Documentation CD”: The home page does
not appear in your default Web Browser. In this case, navigate to the CD in
Windows Explorer, and double-click the readme.html file on the root of the CD.
6.
Click on the link named D20MX Firmware Files.
Result: The Firmware Files folder is displayed. It contains folders named HSP,
SAN0001.15X and SAN0002.15X.
7.
Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the SAN0001.15X sub-folder under the Firmware
Files folder. If you are upgrading the HSP, decide which baud rate you want COM0 to
operate at, and copy/paste one of the files as shown in the following table. To copy a
file, select it and press Ctrl-C. To paste a file, click on the Windows Explorer window
showing the staging folder created in step 4 and press Ctrl-V.
If the desired baud Navigate to folder on D20MX
rate for COM0 is ... Documentation CD or Folder
extracted from Zip File
Copy/Paste the following file to the
staging folder created in step 4
19200
Firmware Files\HSP
hsp_v140_19200.tar
9600
Firmware Files\HSP
hsp_v140_9600.tar
Result: The Windows Explorer window showing the staging folder is displaying one of
the tar files shown above.
8.
9.
If you are downgrading the HSP, refer to the README.TXT file in the Firmware
Files\HSP\Archive folder to determine which HSP version was used in the original
firmware version. Then, copy/paste the corresponding file as shown in the following
table.
Navigate to folder on D20MX Documentation CD
or folder extracted from Zip file ...
Copy/Paste the following files to the
staging folder created in step 4
Firmware Files\HSP\Archive
hsp_v1XX_19200.tar or
hsp_V1XX_9600.tar
Rename the file copied in one of the previous two steps to hsp.tar.
Result: The Windows Explorer window showing the staging folder is displaying the
hsp.tar file.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
89
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Transfer HSP file to the D20MX over a serial link
To transfer an HSP file to a D20MX module:
1.
Restart the D20MX. (If this is a redundant system, restart only the standby D20MX).
2.
When the message “Press Ctrl-E to enter debug mode” appears, press Ctrl-E within 3
seconds.
3.
Log in:
Result: The startup messages appear.
Result: The login dialog appears.
–
For User: type a username that has Maintenance or Read/Write Access and press
Enter.
–
For Password: type the password and press Enter.
Result: The D20M> prompt appears.
4.
Optional: Speed-up communications to shorten download time
Type Baud 115200 and press Enter.
Select 57600 or 38400 if communications errors have occurred previously. Such errors
can occur due to the presence of ambient EMI, a long cable length, a PC with
communication limitations due to CPU speed or when using some serial to USB
adapters.
NOTE
Result: The D20MX is now communicating at 115,200 baud.
5.
4.1.
Select Setup > Serial port…
Result: Tera Term: Serial port setup dialog appears.
4.2.
Select 115,200 from the Baud Rate drop-down list.
4.3.
Click OK.
Result: TeraTerm main window appears and is communicating at 115,200
baud.
Transfer the HSP file:
5.1.
Press Enter to verify that communication is active.
Result: The D20M> prompt appears if the connection is active.
5.2.
Type rz and press Enter to put the D20MX into the state where it is ready to
receive the downloadable code file
5.3.
Click File > Transfer > ZMODEM > Send from menu bar.
Result: A dialog box opens, prompting you to locate the hsp.tar file that you
wish to download.
5.4.
Select the hsp.tar file from the folder created in step 4 of “Stage HSP File for
Serial Transfer”, and click Open to start the transfer.
Do not press any keys on keyboard and do not move the TeraTerm window
during download.
NOTE
Result: The file transfer may take from less than 10 to over 30 minutes, depending on
communication speed selected. When complete, the D20M> prompt appears.
6.
Optional: If you had changed the baud rate prior to the transfer, change the baud rate
back to the original baud rate.
If the original baud rate was 9600, type Baud 9600 and press Enter.
If the original baud rate was 19200, type Baud 19200 and press Enter.
Result: The D20MX is now communicating at 9600 or 19200 baud.
90
6.1.
Select Setup > Serial port…
Result: TeraTerm: Serial port setup dialog appears.
6.2.
Select 9600 or 19200 from the Baud Rate drop-down list.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
6.3.
7.
Click OK.
Result: TeraTerm main window appears and is communicating at 9600 or
19200 baud.
Close the TeraTerm window.
Transfer HSP over a network connection
To transfer an HSP file to the D20MX over a network connection:
1.
Start SGConfig.
2.
Open the project containing the configuration of the target D20MX device.
3.
Click on the D20MX device.
Result: The Welcome to SGConfig screen appears.
Result: The project's Main Page appears.
Result: The Communications group appears in the ribbon.
4.
Change the communication options to enable LAN communication with the D20MX.
Click the SGConfig ribbon Configure group > Communications > Options.
Result: The D2x Device Communication Options dialog box opens.
5.
Click the Interface tab the in the Connection Type group select iSCS LAN, then select
the Preferred LAN you wish to use, either LAN A or LAN B. This will most likely be LAN A.
Result: The iSCS LAN option is selected.
6.
Click OK to close the D2x Device Communication Options dialog box
Result: The dialog box is closed and the SGConfig ribbon Configure group >
Communications > Firmware transfer pick list is now active.
7.
Click the Configure group > Communications > Firmware transfer > HSP transfer.
8.
Read the warning then click Yes to continue or No to abort the operation.
Result: A dialog displaying a warning appears.
Result: If Yes is selected, then refer to the following table. If No is selected, the
operation is aborted.
9.
Possible Result if Yes is Selected
When to expect this result
Go to step
Select Target IP Address dialog
appears
If the D20MX is configured for device
redundancy
step 10
Login dialog appears
If the D20MX is configured for standalone
operation
step 12
Ensure the Standby IP checkbox is checked and if not, check it. In the associated IP
address field, ensure the IP address of the standby unit address is displayed and if
not, enter it.
Click Help for information on how to determine the Standby IP address.
TIP
10. Click OK.
Result: A login dialog appears.
11. Enter the User Name and Password of an account having SHELL access level of
Maintenance or higher and click Login.
Result: The Login dialog box closes, and the Transferring HSP dialog box opens. The
HSP transfer takes place. When the transfer is complete, the Transferring HSP dialog
box closes, and the HSP Transferred successfully dialog box opens.
12. Click OK to close the HSP Transferred successfully dialog box.
Result: The dialog box closes.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
91
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Apply HSP
1.
Start SGConfig.
Result: The Welcome to SGConfig screen appears.
2.
Open the project containing the configuration of the target D20MX device.
Result: The project's Main Page appears.
3.
Change the communication options to enable serial communication with the D20MX.
3.1.
Click the SGConfig ribbon Configure group > Communications > Options.
Result: The D2x Device Communication Options dialog box opens.
3.2.
Click the Interface tab; in the Connection Type group select Direct Serial. If
necessary, select the Communication Port, and in the Port Setting tab, select
the Baud Rate as follows:
Baud Rate
When to set this baud rate
The baud rate of the D20MX console port which is either If the D20MX is configured
9600 or 19200 baud and can be changed with the JBAUD for device redundancy
command.
The baud rate configured for COM0 in WESMAINT
If the D20MX is configured
for standalone operation
Result: The Direct Serial option is selected.
3.3.
Click OK to close D2x Device Communication Options dialog box
Result: The dialog box closes.
4.
Click the SGConfig ribbon Configure group > Communications > Connect to open the
terminal emulator.
5.
If WESMAINT is running, press Enter to get the WESMAINT login screen.
Result: The Terminal Emulator tab appears.
Result: The WESMAINT login screen appears
6.
Enter a User Name and Password of a user account having SHELL access level of
Maintenance or higher.
7.
If WESMAINT is running, navigate to the D20MX SHELL using the WESMAINT menu
items 2 followed by 3. Wait for the countdown, then press Enter several times.
8.
Apply the HSP by clicking the SGConfig ribbon Configure group > Actions > Apply HSP.
9.
Read the warning then click Yes to close the warning dialog box.
Result: The D20M> prompt appears
Result: A dialog box displaying a warning opens.
Result: The warning dialog box closes and the Applying HSP dialog box opens.
10. The terminal emulator screen shows the progress of the HSP update.
11. This process can take 5 minutes to 1/2 hour to apply the HSP depending on which
components are updated.
12. When complete, there are two possibilities
–
An Information dialog box asks you to toggle the power switch on the D20MX. If
so, perform the following steps:
12.1. Click OK to close the information dialog box.
Result: The dialog box closes.
12.2. Toggle the power switch on the D20MX.
Result: The D20MX restarts with the new JMON, Bootrom and FPGA.
–
An information dialog indicates the operation is complete. If so, just click OK to
close the information dialog box.
13. Close the SGConfig Terminal Emulator.
92
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Transfer D20/D200 configurations to the D20MX
Use this information to transfer existing D20 and D200 device configurations to the D20MX
using either ConfigPro or SGConfig.
Transferring a multi-processor D200 only transfers the application configurations on the
first processor.
This is manually resolved by moving applications from other processors to the first
processor using the SGConfig device editing functions BEFORE converting the device to a
D20MX in the instructions below.
NOTE
The word “transfer” is used within the context of this guide to mean that the device
configuration files are moved and modified, in order to work properly on a D20 with a
D20MX processor.
Transfer existing D20 or D200 configurations to the D20MX
Prerequisites
Before you can transfer a D20 or D200 device configuration, the following components
must be present:
•
SGConfig installed on the configuration computer. The minimum SGConfig version
supported is 8.1.
•
D20MX Documentation CD (part number 588-0075 VXX) in either of the following
formats:
•
–
Physical CD media, or
–
Zip file
D20 or D200 Configuration has been migrated to SGConfig with the Migration Wizard
(Refer to the Migration Wizard screencast).
Note: The Migration Wizard supports ConfigPro 2.0 and higher configurations.
•
To save time, you may upgrade the firmware definition of your D20 or D200
Configuration to SAN0001 or SAN0002 in ConfigProTM 5.03 or higher. If you choose
this option and are updating a:
–
D20 device configuration, perform the steps in section:
“Updating a D20 configuration to use the D20MX firmware definition with
ConfigPro” on page 100.
–
•
D200 device configuration, perform the steps in the following sections:
1.
“Updating a D200 configuration to use the D20MX firmware definition with
ConfigPro” on page 104.
2.
“Updating a D20 configuration to use the D20MX firmware definition with
ConfigPro” on page 100.
A NULL modem cable (GE part number 977-0529) connecting the RS-232 connector
on the front panel of the D20MX to the serial communications port of the
configuration computer.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
93
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Procedure
To transfer a D20 or D200 device configuration to the D20MX:
In the event that you have selected dialog checkbox “Do not show this message
again”, some of the following steps do not appear. Accordingly, ignore the affected
steps.
NOTE
1.
Start SGConfig.
Result: The Welcome to SGConfig screen appears.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Choose the D20MX Factory Default Configuration file, D20MX01-XX.7zip or D20MX02XX.7zip. based on the following criteria:
–
If transferring a configuration containing B009 versions greater than 310 and
B021 versions greater than 912 use the file D20MX01-XX.7zip
–
If transferring a configuration containing B009 versions less than or equal to 310
and B021 versions less than or equal to 912, use the file D20MX02-XX.7zip.
If the D20MX01-XX or D20MX02-XX default configuration has already been imported,
go to step 4 to open the default configuration. Otherwise perform these sub-steps:
3.1.
Click GE button > Archive > Project > Restore.
Result: The Restore Project Details window appears.
3.2.
Click … .
Result: The Select a File window appears.
3.3.
Navigate to the DVD/CD drive or the ISO Image sub-folder nested two levels
into the folder extracted from the D20MX Documentation CD zip file. Then
navigate to Configuration Files > SGConfig.
Result: The two files D20MX01-XX.zip and D20MX02-XX.zip appear in the dialog.
3.4.
Select the appropriate file based on your decision in step 2.
3.5.
Click OK.
Result: On completion a pop-up message appears (e.g., Project D20MX01-XX
has been restored).
3.6.
Click OK.
Open the SGConfig project containing the D20 or D200 device.:
4.1.
Click the GE button.
4.2.
Click the required SGConfig project in the Recent Projects list or select the
Open Project menu item.
Make a backup copy of the original D20 or D200 device configuration:
5.1.
6.
94
Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
5.2.
Click the D20 or D200 device.
5.3.
Click the ribbon Configure group > Edit > Copy.
5.4.
Click a blank area on the page onto which the copy is to be placed.
5.5.
Click the ribbon Configure group > Edit > Paste.
Result: The Copying device window appears.
Result: Once completed a new device named COPY_OF_<original device
name> or <original device name>_COPY appears.
Change the device type to D20MX.
6.1.
Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
6.2.
Click the D20 or D200 device.
6.3.
Click the ribbon Configure group > Configuration > Hardware > Processor >
Change Type.
Result: The Change Device dialog appears.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
7.
8.
9.
6.4.
Select the D20MX type and click OK.
Result: A dialog is displayed indicating that the device type has been changed
successfully.
6.5.
Click OK.
Result: The device is now displayed as a D20MX.
Select a D20MX processor from the D20MX Device Wizard:
7.1.
Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
7.2.
Click the D20MX device.
7.3.
Click the ribbon Configure group > Edit > Properties.
7.4.
Click Next until the Processor tab appears.
7.5.
Click the Processor tab > General sub-tab.
7.6.
From the Part Number field, click Select.
Result: The Select a Processor Card window appears.
7.7.
Select one of the three D20MX processor type part numbers (526-3001, 5263003 or 526-3005).
7.8.
Click OK, Next, and Finish.
Result: The D20MX Device Wizard closes.
Import the firmware definition from the factory default configuration (if you had opted
to upgrade the firmware in ConfigPro, then this step is not necessary):
8.1.
Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
8.2.
Click anywhere on the main page of the project to deselect the device.
8.3.
Click the ribbon Configure group > Miscellaneous > Firmware Library.
Result: The Firmware Library window appears with the firmware definition
selected.
8.4.
Select Import.
Result: The Firmware Import window appears.
8.5.
From the Project Name drop down list, select D20MX01-XX or D20MX02-XX
based on the decision taken in step 2.
Result: The SAN0001 or SAN0002 firmware appears in the Firmware Available
list.
8.6.
Click OK.
Result: The Firmware Library window reappears with the SAN0001 or SAN0002
firmware in the list.
8.7.
Click Close.
Result: The Firmware Library window closes.
Apply the firmware definition from the factory default configuration (if you had opted
to upgrade the firmware in ConfigPro, then this step is not necessary).
9.1.
Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
9.2.
Click the D20MX device.
9.3.
Click the ribbon Configure group > Edit > Properties.
Result: The D20MX Device Wizard Basic Settings window appears.
9.4.
Click Next until the Processor tab appears.
9.5.
Click the Firmware sub tab and Select.
9.6.
Select either SAN0001/XX or SAN0002/XX as per the decision taken in step 2.
Result: The Changing Device dialog appears. After some time it closes and the
D20MX Device Wizard appears.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
95
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
9.7.
Click Finish.
Result: The D20MX Device Wizard closes.
10. Import the RADIUS roles from the D20MX default configuration into the D20MX device:
10.1. Double-click the D20MX device.
Result: The Application List popup appears.
10.2. Double-click the WESMAINT II+ application.
Result: The WESMAINT II+ table icon set appears.
10.3. Right-click the RADIUS Role Table icon and select Import.
Result: The Select source directory dialog appears.
10.4. Navigate to the DVD/CD drive or the ISO Image sub-folder nested two levels
into the folder extracted from the D20MX Documentation CD zip file. Then
navigate to Configuration Files > DefaultTableSettings > B014-1 WESMAINT
II+.
Result: The file B014RADR.CSV appears in the dialog.
10.5. Select the file named B014RADR.CSV, and click Open.
Result: The WESMAINT II+ table icon set re-appears.
10.6. Double-click the RADIUS Role Table icon.
Result: The RADIUS Role Table editor appears.
10.7. Compare the first column of the Access Flags sub-table (RADIUS Role Table >
Application Control) to the following figure to confirm that the import was
successful:
10.8. Click OK, OK and Close.
Result: The WESMAINT II+ table editor closes.
11. If the D20 configuration being transferred is LAN-based, import the LAN Redundancy
Manager point descriptors:
11.1. Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
96
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
11.2. Double-click the D20MX device.
Result: The Application List popup appears.
11.3. Double-click the System Point Database application.
Result: The System Point Database Properties dialog appears.
11.4. Select LAN Redundancy Manager and click Descriptors.
Result: The Point Descriptors dialog appears.
11.5. Click on the Import button.
Result: The Import Point Descriptors dialog appears.
11.6. Click OK.
Result: The Browse For Folder dialog appears.
11.7. Navigate to the DVD/CD drive or the ISO Image sub-folder nested two levels
into the folder extracted from the D20MX Documentation CD zip file. Then
navigate to Configuration Files > DefaultPointDescriptions > B119-1N LAN
Redundancy Manager and click OK.
Result: The Point Descriptors dialog appears.
11.8. Confirm the point descriptors are as shown below.
11.9. Click OK, OK and Close.
Result: The main project window appears.
12. Optionally, update the RADIUS and SYSLOG settings in B014-1N (WESMAINT II+):
12.1. Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
12.2. Double-click the D20MX device.
Result: The Application List popup appears.
12.3. Double-click the WESMAINT II+ application.
Result: The WESMAINT II+ table icon set appears.
12.4. Update the new tables: Remote RADIUS Servers Table, Remote Syslog Servers
Table, TLS Auth Info Table, TLS CA Info Table, First PEM File Table, Second PEM
File Table and Login Warning Banner Table, referring to the B014-1NCG
WESMAINT II+ configuration guide.
13. If the configuration being transferred is a D200 configuration that contained network
applications on node 2+, perform the task described in section “Transferring a D200
configuration containing network applications on node 2+” on page 99.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
97
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
14. If the configuration being transferred is LAN-based, generate the iSCS Configuration
for the Project:
14.1.
Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
14.2. Click: the D20MX device.
14.3.
Click the ribbon Configure group > iSCS > Generate.
14.4. Confirm that there are zero errors in the Device Log; any Warnings are
acceptable.
15. If the configuration being transferred is not LAN-based, generate the configuration for
the device:
15.1. Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
15.2. Click the D20MX device.
15.3. Click the ribbon Configure group > Configuration > Generate.
15.4. Confirm that there are zero errors in the Device Log; any Warnings are
acceptable.
16. Review warnings:
16.1. Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration.
16.2. Click the D20MX device.
16.3. Click the ribbon Configure group > Draw > select Output Window.
Result: The Device Log window appears.
16.4. Review all warnings and make corrections as needed, reviewing the backup
copy to retrieve values that may have been replaced with default values during
the transfer.
17. Transfer the new configuration to the D20MX:
17.1. Click the Project tab of the original D20 or D200 device configuration
17.2. Click: the D20MX device.
17.3. Click the ribbon Configure group > Communications > Options.
Result: The Device Communication Options widow appears.
17.4. Click Interface tab > Connection Type.
17.5. Select Direct Serial and change the Communications Port to the serial port
that is connected to the D20MX.
Result: The Communications Options window shows that Connection Type is
set to Direct Serial and the Communications Port is set to the serial port
connected to the D20MX.
17.6. Click the Port Settings tab and set the Baud Rate to the baud rate of the
D20MX (9600 or 19200 bps - see “RS-232” on page 65 if you need to change the
baud rate), and select the Software Transmit and Software Receive
checkboxes. Then click OK.
Result: The D2x Device Communications Options dialog closes.
17.7. Physically connect the PC's serial port using the RS232 NULL modem cable to
either the front serial port of the:
– Standby D20MX, if the D20MX is configured for device redundancy, or
– Standalone D20MX, if the D20MX is configured for standalone operation.
17.8. Click the Configure ribbon group > Communications group > Connect.
Result: The Terminal Emulator window opens.
17.9. Login to the D20MX using the username admin and password changeme.
Result: The D20M> prompt appears.
98
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
17.10. Click the Configure ribbon group > Actions> Sync To.
Result: The Downloading Configuration File dialog appears showing the
progress of the download. At the conclusion, a Confirm dialog appears with
three buttons: Boot, Verify and Exit.
17.11. Click Boot.
Result: The D20MX reboots with the new configuration.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
All users that existed in the transferred D20/D200 configuration now have the default
password: changeme. Change these passwords using the passwd command in the D20MX
Shell. Refer to the WESMAINT II+ for D20MX Configuration Guide B014- 0NCG for details of
this command.
If the D20MX was configured for device redundancy, once the sync to operation is
complete, the standby unit reboots and comes up again as standby with the new
configuration. If desired, switch over and synchronize the new configuration to the other
unit through the “Switch Over” and “Database Sync” functions available in the WESMAINT
System Functions menu. Refer to the WESMAINT II+ for D20MX User's Guide B014-0NUG
for details on these functions.
When transferring a redundant D20/D200, ensure the new D20MX standby IP addresses
do not conflict with other devices in the project or the secondary IP addresses described in
section “Transferring a D200 configuration containing network applications on node 2+”
on page 99. If they do, you may disable the standby IP addresses or reassign them as
described in “IP addresses” on page 63. If there are any conflicts, the WESMAINT error log
of the D20MX will log warnings such as the following:
1 ROOT N0: W001: IP of RDT1 same as CCUB
Where RDT1 is the host name of the device with a conflicting IP address.
Transferring a D200 configuration containing network applications
on node 2+
When transferring a D200 configuration that contained network applications on node 2+,
use secondary IP addresses to avoid changing trusted client IP addresses in devices in the
substation.
To configure and use secondary IP addresses:
1.
Enter the node 2+ IP addresses of the original D200 configuration into the SGConfig or
the ConfigPro Project properties located in D20 Device properties > LAN Properties >
Hosts tab.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
99
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
2.
Use the B119-1 LAN Redundancy Manager to create secondary IP addresses for the
node 2+ IP addresses by referencing the host names created in the previous step. (See
“B119-1NCG LAN Redundancy Manager for the D20MX” for further information).
3.
In the network application (e.g., DNP3 Data Link) transferred from node 2+, change the
Local Host Name field to contain the secondary host name. Refer to the configuration
guides: “B052-0NCG DNP V3.00 Internet Data Link” or “B086-0CG IEC 60870-5-104
Data Link” for further details.
This step is important because it causes the source IP to be the secondary IP in
outgoing connections or UDP datagrams.
Do not use * in the Local Host Name because the source IP could end up being the
main IP or any of the secondary IP addresses.
If you are transferring the MODBUS TCP/IP DCA A135-0 from node 2+, then ensure
each MODBUS TCP/IP IED accepts all IP addresses of the D20MX that are on the same
subnet as the IED's IP address.
It is not necessary to add a Local Host Name for the MODBUS TCP/IP DPA A131-0.
Updating a D20 configuration to use the D20MX firmware definition
with ConfigPro
Use this information to update the firmware definition of an existing D20 device to the
D20MX firmware definition. The result is a device archive that you can migrate into
SGConfig for the purpose of transferring the D20 configuration to the D20MX.
100
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Prerequisites
Before you can update the firmware definition of a D20 device configuration, the following
components must be present:
•
ConfigPro 5.03 or higher installed on the configuration computer.
Note: If you are using a ConfigPro version older than 5.03, skip this procedure and
migrate your ConfigPro project archives directly into SGConfig. Then follow the
procedure in section: “Transfer D20/D200 configurations to the D20MX” on page 93.
•
Procedure
D20MX Documentation CD (part no. 588-0075 VXX) in either of the following formats:
–
Physical CD media, or
–
Zip file
To update a D20 or D200 device configuration to the D20MX:
1.
Press the Windows Key
and E at the same time.
Result: The Windows Explorer window appears.
2.
Navigate to a folder to which you have write permissions.
Result: The content of the folder appears.
3.
Click the New folder button in Windows Explorer
Result: A new folder is created with the name “New folder” and the cursor is positioned
to allow renaming of the folder.
4.
Rename the folder to D20MXVXX.
5.
Access the D20MX Documentation CD files by either:
Result: The folder is renamed to D20MXVXX.
5.1.
Insert the D20MX Documentation CD in to the computer’s DVD/CD drive, or
5.2.
Extract the D20MX Documentation CD zip file on to the root of your C: drive and
double click the readme.html file under the ISO-Image sub-folder, which is
nested two levels deep into the extracted folder.
Result: The Documentation CD home page appears in your default Web Browser.
Result: Alternately for step 5.1, the home page does not appear in your default Web
Browser. In this case, navigate to the CD in Windows Explorer, and double-click the
readme.html file on the root of the CD.
6.
Under the D20MX Factory Default Configuration Files section, click on the link
named ConfigPro.
7.
Using Windows Explorer, copy/paste the files as shown in the following table. To copy
a file, select it and press Ctrl-C. To paste a file, click on the Windows Explorer window
showing the new D20MXVXX folder and press Ctrl-V.
Result: The Factory Default Configuration Files folder appears.
Navigate to folder on D20MX Documentation CD or
Folder extracted from the Zip File
Copy/Paste the following files to the
new folder D20MXVXX
MX01-XX.zip
MX01-XX.zip
MX02-XX.zip
MX02-XX.zip
Result: The files shown in the above table appear in the new D20MXVXX folder of the
Windows Explorer window.
8.
Start Config Pro 5.03 or higher.
Result: The main window of ConfigPro appears with the tree view of the project
directory on the left.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
101
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
9.
Choose the D20MX Factory Default Configuration file, MX01-XX.zip or MX02-XX.zip.
based on the following criteria:
–
If transferring a configuration containing B009 versions greater than 310 and
B021 versions greater than 912 use the file MX01-XX.zip
–
If transferring a configuration containing B009 versions less than or equal to 310
and B021 versions less than or equal to 912, use the file MX02-XX.zip.
10. If the MX01-XX or MX02-XX default configuration has already been imported, go to
step 18. Otherwise, select from the menu bar Project > Archive Project > Restore.
Result: The Restore Project from ZIP File dialog appears
11. Under the Select Source Project ZIP File area, click the document icon.
Result: The Select a Project ZIP file to Restore dialog appears.
12. Navigate to the new D20MXVXX folder.
Result: The two files MX01-XX.zip and MX02-XX.zip appear in the dialog.
13. Select the appropriate file based on your decision made in the second step and click
the Select button.
Result: The Restore Project from ZIP File dialog appears with the selected file showing
under the Select Source Project ZIP File area.
14. Under the “Restore To” area, click the folder icon.
Result: The Select the Destination Project Directory dialog appears.
15. Navigate to your ConfigPro project folder on a hard drive of the configuration
computer. The project folder is typically named C:\WESDATA.
Result: The contents of the project folder are displayed, and the file named
WPL400.DB is selected.
16. Click the Select button.
Result: The Restore Project from ZIP File dialog reappears with the Project Directory set
to the folder you selected in the previous step.
17. Change the Project Name if desired and click OK.
Result: The main window of ConfigPro appears with the tree view of the project
directory on the left. The new D20MX factory default project appears in the tree view.
18. Double-click on the D20MX factory default project.
Result: The Main Page of the D20MX factory default project appears with the FAC_DEF
device placed on the page.
19. Double-click the FAC_DEF device.
Result: The Missing Applications! dialog appears.
20. Click the Install button.
Result: The Select the Source Application Definition Directory dialog appears.
21. Navigate to the DVD/CD drive > DEFNS > APPLDEF.
Result: The contents of the APPLDEF folder appears with the file DAL100.DB selected.
22. Click Select.
Result: Messages are displayed about the application definitions being extracted to
the configuration computer, and finally the Data Collection Applications of the
FAC_DEF device appear.
23. Close the device configuration by clicking on the door icon.
Result: The Main Page of the D20MX factory default project appears with the FAC_DEF
device appearing on the page.
24. Click from the menu bar, Device > Firmware.
Result: The Firmware Library dialog appears.
102
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
25. Depending on which factory default project you chose in step 9, select either
SAN0001/XX or SAN0002/XX.
26. Click Copy.
Result: The Firmware Information dialog appears.
27. In the “Copy To” area select the Project Directory and Project Name of the project you
want to transfer to the D20MX.
Result: The “Copy To” area contains the Project Directory and Project Name of the
project you want to transfer to the D20MX.
28. Click OK, Close and the door icon
Result: The main window of ConfigPro appears with the tree view of the project
directory on the left.
29. Make a backup copy of your project.
29.1. Select from the menu bar, Project > Copy Project.
Result: The Copy Project dialog appears.
29.2. In the “From” area, navigate to the folder and select the project you want to
transfer to the D20MX.
29.3. In the “To” area, enter a new unique name for the project.
29.4. Click OK.
Result: The main window of ConfigPro appears with the tree view of the project
directory on the left.
30. On the tree view displayed to the left, navigate to the copied project and double-click
on the project name.
Result: The main window of the copied project appears.
31. Right-click on the D20 device you want to transfer and select Properties.
Result: The D20 Device Properties window appears.
32. Click the Processor tab and the Firmware tab. Then click Select.
Result: The Select a Firmware Type dialog appears. Depending on which factory
default project you chose in the second step, either SAN0001 or SAN0002 appears.
33. Select whichever of SAN0001 or SAN0002 appears and click OK and OK.
Result: A confirmation dialog appears asking if you want to make a backup copy now.
34. Click No because you have already made a backup.
Result: Messages appear indicating the upgrade is in progress. Messages appear in
the Device Log indicating the results of the upgrade. The D20 device appears with a
red dot.
35. Review all warnings and make corrections as needed, reviewing the original copy to
retrieve values that may have been replaced with default values during the upgrade
36. Right-click on the device and click Generate.
Result: The device appears without a red dot.
37. Right-click on the device and click Archive > Save.
Result: The Save Device to ZIP File dialog appears.
38. In the “Save To” area, click the folder icon.
Result: A dialog appears with the title “Select a directory in which to save the project”.
39. Navigate to a folder on your PC where you would like to save the device archive and
click Select and OK.
40. Close ConfigPro.
41. Migrate the D20 Device Archive into SGConfig using the Migration Wizard (Refer to the
Migration Wizard screencast).
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
103
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Updating a D200 configuration to use the D20MX firmware
definition with ConfigPro
Use this information to update the firmware definition of an existing D200 device to the
D20MX firmware definition. The result is a device archive that you can migrate into
SGConfig for the purpose of transferring the D200 configuration to the D20MX.
Prerequisites
Before you can update the firmware definition of a D200 device configuration, the
following components must be present
•
ConfigPro 5.03 or higher installed on the configuration computer.
•
D20MX Documentation CD (part no. 588-0075 VXX) in either of the following formats:
–
Physical CD media, or
–
Zip file
Procedure
Migrating a multi-processor D200 only transfers the application configurations on the first
processor.
This is manually resolved by moving applications from other processors to the first
processor using the ConfigPro device editing functions BEFORE converting the device to a
D20 in the instructions below.
Single and multi-processor D200 devices must first be changed into D20 devices before
the D20MX firmware definition can be selected.
To change a D200 device into a D20 device perform the following steps:
1.
Start ConfigPro 5.03 or higher.
Result: The main window of ConfigPro appears with the tree view of the project
directory on the left.
2.
3.
Make a backup copy of the project you want to transfer to the D20MX.
2.1.
Select from the menu, Project > Copy Project.
Result: The Copy Project dialog appears.
2.2.
In the “From” area, navigate to the folder and select the project you want to
transfer to the D20MX.
2.3.
In the “To” area, enter a new unique name for the project.
2.4.
Click OK.
Result: The main window of ConfigPro appears with the tree view of the project
directory on the left.
On the tree view displayed to the left, navigate to the project and double-click on the
project name.
Result: The main window of the copied project appears
4.
Right-click on the D20 device you want to transfer and select Tools > Change.
Result: The Change Device window appears.
104
5.
Select type D20 and click OK.
6.
Follow the steps in section: “Updating a D20 configuration to use the D20MX firmware
definition with ConfigPro” on page 100.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Software (feature) licensing
The D20MX application image file contains all the applications currently available for the
D20MX. Some of these applications are licensed and are not available until they are
unlocked.
These licensed applications are in groups, called application groups, and are identified by
a license code.
Currently application groups 001 and 002 are available. Future releases of the application
image file will provide more groups.
Use the D20M Shell command:
Enable trial period
•
swlic-report to view the list of application groups.
•
swlic-list to view the applications in each group.
An application group may be temporarily enabled for a 30-day trial period.
To enable a trial, use the command swlic-trial -id 001 to enable application group 001.
For example:
D20M> swlic-trial -id 001
Trial license for '001' will be valid until 2013-03-18 (30 days)
Are you sure you want to enable the trial license for '001' [y/N]: y
INFO: Trial License '001' enabled until 2013-03-18
The D20MX must be rebooted for the trial period to take effect
NOTE
View the license
status
The D20M Shell command swlic-report lists the status of the license. Each license group is
listed.
For example:
D20M>swlic-report
License Report Utility v01.000
License Information
==============================================================
Target Unit
: D20MX
Serial Number
: 526-3003-000001
Customer
: Utility ABC
License created from
: D400 Utilities V1.0.1
License Version
: 01.000
Application License
Status
==============================================================
001 : D2X Classic Applications
Trial Disabled
002 : Advanced Automation Applications
Trial Enabled
Unlock an application
group
To unlock an application group, an unlock code must be purchased from GE. Please
contact Technical Support for the unlock code.
Technical Support asks for the 'Hardware Identifier' of the D20MX that is to have the
application group unlocked. This is a unique identifier for each D20MX and cannot be used
with any other D20MX (that is, the license is non-transferrable).
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
105
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
View the hardware
identifier
Use the D20M Shell command swlic-info to view the Hardware Identifier.
For example:
D20M>swlic-info
System Information
License Information Utility V01.000
====================================================================
Target Unit
Hardware Identifier
License File
: D20MX
: 303064303163306237323461
: /tffs0/swLicense/license.key: Good
Technical Support sends you either:
Unlock code
•
An unlock code
•
An new license file (license.key)
•
Or a batch file (batch.lic) which can be used on multiple D20MXs
If Technical Support sends an unlock code, use the D20M Shell command swlic-unlock -l
<unlock code> to unlock the application group.
For example:
D20M>swlic-unlock -l 6E62385170303537533061626B66706643673D3D
Unlock Key is Valid
Info : License for '001' and been unlocked
This unlocks the application group 001.
License file
If Technical Support sends a license file (license.key), use a SCP (Secure Copy) application,
such as WinSCP, to copy the license file over the network to the /ram directory on the
D20MX.
Alternatively, use the D20M Shell RZ command to download the license file via Z-Modem
through the console port. The RZ command automatically places the file in the /ram
directory.
The file must be named license.key.
NOTE
Use the D20M Shell command CL (Copy License) to process the license file. This command
copies the license file to the correct location on the D20MX, and if there are no errors, the
D20MX automatically restarts.
For example:
D20M>cl
Found License file (/ram/license.key) - copying
copying file /ram/license.key -> /tffs0/swLicense/license.key
License file copied -- rebooting ....
Batch file
If Technical Support sends a batch file (batch.lic), use a SCP (Secure Copy) application, such
as WinSCP, to copy the batch file over the network to the /ram directory on the D20MX.
Alternatively, use the D20M Shell RZ command to download the license file via Z-Modem
through the console port. The RZ command automatically places the file in the /ram
directory.
The file must be named batch.lic.
NOTE
106
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
Use the D20M Shell command CL (Copy License) to process the batch file. This command
processes the /ram/batch.lic file, extracting the appropriate license block and creates a
new license file (license.lic). If there are no errors, the D20MX automatically restarts.
For the batch file to be processed, a license file must be in place. Use the command swlicinfo to verify a license file is in place.
NOTE
For example:
D20M>cl
Found Batch file (/ram/batch.lic) - processing
copying file /ram/batch.lic -> /tffs0/swLicense/batch.lic
Batch License Installation '/tffs0/swLicense/batch.lic'
Searching for serial number '526-3003-000001''
License Found in Batch File
copying file /ram/newlicense.key -> /tffs0/swLicense/license.key
Success : Success License file updated
Configuring Serial Expansion Cards
A D20MX can be ordered with up to four serial expansion auxiliary cards. Each card
provides 7 serial ports. Configure serial expansion cards as follows in SGConfig and
ConfigPro.
If using SGConfig to configure serial expansion cards:
1.
Start SGConfig.
Result: The Welcome to SGConfig screen appears.
2.
3.
Open the SGConfig project containing the D20MX device.
2.1.
Click the GE button.
2.2.
Click the required SGConfig project in the Recent Projects list or select the
Open Project menu item.
Add Serial Expansion Auxiliary cards from the D20MX Device Wizard:
3.1.
Click the Project tab of the D20MX device configuration.
3.2.
Click the D20MX device.
3.3.
Click the ribbon Configure group > Edit > Properties.
3.4.
Click Next until the Processor tab appears.
3.5.
Click the VME Cards tab. The Serial Expansion card will be under Available VME
Expansion Cards.
3.6.
Click Select once for each serial expansion card in the D20MX hardware
configuration
Result: 1 to 4 Serial Expansion Auxiliary Cards show up under Selected VME
Expansion Cards
4.
Click Next and Finish.
Result: The D20MX Device Wizard closes.
If Using ConfigPro to configure serial expansion cards:
1.
Start ConfigPro
Result: The ConfigPro splash screen starts.
2.
Open the ConfigPro project containing the D20MX device.
3.
Double click the project appearing in the Projects tab.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
107
CHAPTER 6: CONFIGURING THE SOFTWARE
4.
Right click on the device and select Properties.
5.
Click the VME Cards tab. The Serial Expansion card will be under the list named
Available VME Expansion Cards. Even though these cards do not have the same part
number as the D20MX Serial Expansion Auxiliary Card, they can be used to make the
required serial ports available in ConfigPro.
6.
Click Select two times for each Serial Expansion Auxiliary Card installed on your
D20MX.
Result: The D20 Device Properties dialog appears.
Result: 2 to 8 VME Expansion Cards show up under Selected VME Expansion Cards.
7.
Click OK.
Result: The D20 Device Properties dialog closes.
After performing the above procedure in either SGConfig or ConfigPro, select the
expansion serial ports using the naming convention shown in Table 21. Refer to the
particular application configuration guide for which field selects the port name.
Table 21: Port names used with SGConfig and ConfigPro
108
SGConfig Port Range ConfigPro Port Range
Physical Com Ports
COM1 to COM7
COM1 to COM7
Port 1 to 7 on D20MX
CB-1 to CB-7
COM8, COM9, COMA to COME Port 1 to 7 on First Serial Expansion Card
CC-1 to CC-7
COMF to COML
Port 1 to 7 on Second Serial Expansion Card
CD-1 to CD-7
COMM to COMS
Port 1 to 7 on Third Serial Expansion Card
CE-1 to CE-7
COMT to COMZ
Port 1 to 7 on Fourth Serial Expansion Card
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 7: Using the D20MX
Substation Controller
Using the D20MX Substation Controller
The D20 Substation Controller operation can be monitored and accessed through the:
•
D20MX processor front panel LEDs
–
Operational status LEDs
–
LAN port status LEDs
–
Fiber optic status port LEDs
•
Power supply
•
I/O peripherals
D20MX processor front panel LEDs
Once the D20MX is powered up, the LED indicators on the front panel become active. The
indicators provide status information on the operation of the D20MX.
Operational status LEDs
The status LEDs (see Table 22) indicate the unit’s operational status:
Table 22: D20MX - status LED operation
LED Display
IRIG
PWR
Label
Color
Status Description
PWR
Green
Power
Solid light when 5 V DC power is correctly supplied to the
processor board.
OFF when 5 V DC is not present.
RDY
Green
Ready
Flashes when Initialization (boot-up and self-diagnostics) of
the D20MX is complete and the unit is ready to process data.
RDY
IRIG
PWR
RDY
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
109
CHAPTER 7: USING THE D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
LED Display
IRIG
PWR
Label
Color
Status Description
IRIG
Green
Flashes when an IRIG-B format time synchronization signal
has been supplied to the unit and has been used to set the
D20 system clock.
Note: When removing IRIG-B signal, the LED keeps blinking
for up to a minute before turning off.
RDY
IRIG
Green
PWR
Normally off; reserved for future expansion.
RDY
LAN port status LEDs
The LAN Port Status LEDs (see Table 23) provide a visual indication of the status for the
Ethernet communication ports on the front of the D20MX.
Table 23: D20MX - LAN port status LED operation
LED Display
LINK
ACT
LINK
ACT
Label
Color
Status Description
LINK
Orange for 1000BASE-T.
Green for 10/100BASE-T
Link 1, Link 2
Solid light when an active device is
connected to the Ethernet port.
ACT
Yellow
Activity 1, Activity 2
Flashes when data is transmitted or
received on the channel.
Fiber optic port status LED
The fiber optic port status LEDs (see Table 24) provide a visual indication of the status for
fiber optic ports 1 and 2.
Table 24: D20MX - Fiber optic port status LED operation
LED Display
ACT 1 ACT 2
Label
Color
Status Description
LINK 1
LINK 2
Green
Link 1, Link 2
Solid light when an active device is connected to the fiber
optic port.
ACT 1
ACT 2
Yellow
Activity 1, Activity 2
Flashes when data is transmitted or received on the
channel.
LINK 1 LINK 2
ACT 1 ACT 2
LINK 1 LINK 2
D20 power supply LEDs
On the chassis-mounted D20 power supplies, an LED indicator is available for each
supply voltage. The indicators are illuminated green when that voltage is present.
110
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 7: USING THE D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
I/O peripheral LEDs
The WESDAC/WESTERM Peripheral pairs have a common section made up of components
on the WESDAC and WESTERM boards. There are seven LED indicators on this common
section.
Table 25 lists and describes the I/O peripherals - common LEDs.
Table 25: I/O peripherals - common LEDs
LED Name
Designation
Normal RUN
Not Initialized
DS1
Power On
On
On
DS2
MPU Run
Flash 10/sec
See Next Table
DS3
Tx1
Flickers Constantly
Depends on Nature of Fault
DS4
Rx1
Flickers Constantly
Depends on Nature of Fault
DS5
Tx2
Configuration Dependent
Depends on Nature of Fault
DS6
Rx2
Configuration Dependent
Depends on Nature of Fault
DS7
Fault
Off
See Next Table
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
111
CHAPTER 7: USING THE D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
112
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 8: Servicing the D20MX
Substation Controller
Servicing the D20MX Substation Controller
This chapter describes how to:
•
Inspect the unit
•
Remove the D20MX processor
•
Change fuses
Performing periodic inspection
Periodic inspection is recommended to ensure that:
•
The device has sustained no accidental physical damage
•
Connectors and cables are intact and firmly attached
Performing maintenance
The D20 does not require scheduled maintenance.
However, small metallic particles (such as wire clippings) can fall through the ventilation
holes on the top of the unit, possibly damaging or interfering with the safe and reliable
operation of the D20.
Ensure that the D20 is protected from falling debris during maintenance. If you cover the
unit for maintenance, remove cover before operating to provide adequate cooling airflow.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
113
CHAPTER 8: SERVICING THE D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
Removing the D20MX processor module
The D20MX can be removed from a D20 Substation Controller non-VME (GE part number
500-0305), a D20 Substation Controller VME (GE part number 500-0280) D20 chassis.
Ensure that you are sufficiently grounded to prevent ESD damage to the D20MX or other
components. See section: “Grounding the D20MX” on page 54.
To remove the D20MX
from a D20 chassis
1.
Power down the D20 and disconnect the power supply.
2.
Disconnect all communication cables from the front panel of the D20MX and the
backplane of the D20 chassis.
3.
Loosen the front panel retaining screws.
4.
Remove the blank plates located above and below the D20MX.
5.
Slide the D20MX partially out.
6.
For the D20MX Non-VME with Dual 100Base-FX Fiber Optic Card (526-3005LF) only:
7.
6.1.
Disconnect the 975-1236 cable (connecting the fiber optic daughter card) from
connectors J3 and J4 on the D20MX processor module.
6.2.
Loosen the D20MX fiber card front panel retaining screws.
6.3.
Carefully slide out the D20MX fiber card partially.
6.4.
Remove the 975-1236 cable through the middle slot in the chassis.
6.5.
Store the D20MX fiber card in static-protective packaging.
Grasp the D20MX by the front handles and slide the processor module all the way out
of the D20 chassis.
Allow the D20MX to cool before removing. The heatsink of the D20MX may be extremely
hot during and immediately after operation. Use caution when removing the processor
module from the chassis to avoid being burned.
8.
114
Store the D20MX in static-protective packaging.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 8: SERVICING THE D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
Fuses
The fuses listed in section are standard fuses that are factory-installed, unless otherwise
specified.
Fuse ratings may differ due to:
•
Unique customer-specific configurations or requirements, or
•
Product specification changes
When changing fuses, always check the original fuse for value and type, and ensure the
replacement fuse you use is of that same value and type. Do not assume that installed fuse
is of the correct value.
Replacing D20 fuses
Field-replaceable fuses for the standard D20 chassis-mounted Power Supplies are listed in
Table 26.
Table 26: D20 field-replaceable fuses
Power Supply Fuse
Fuse Function
Replacement Fuse
Fuse Part Number
580-2004
F1
+DC Input
LITTLEFUSE
0326012.MXP
940-0425: Fuse, SLOBLO, 12A/250V
F2
-DC Input
LITTLEFUSE
0326012.MXP
940-0425: Fuse, SLOBLO, 12A/250V
F1
+DC Input
LITTLEFUSE
0326012.MXP
940-0425: Fuse, SLOBLO, 12A/250V
F2
-DC Input
LITTLEFUSE
0326012.MXP
940-0425: Fuse, SLOBLO, 12A/250V
F1
Line/+DC Input
LITTLEFUSE
0313004.MXP
940-0424: Fuse, SLOBLO, 4A/250V
F2
Neutral/-DC Input
LITTLEFUSE
0313004.MXP
940-0424: Fuse, SLOBLO, 4A/250V
F1
Line/+DC Input
LITTLEFUSE
0313004.MXP
940-0424: Fuse, SLOBLO, 4A/250V
F2
Neutral/-DC Input
LITTLEFUSE
0313004.MXP
940-0424: Fuse, SLOBLO, 4A/250V
580-2005
580-2006
580-2007
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
115
CHAPTER 8: SERVICING THE D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER
116
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 9: Generating a System
Default Configuration for the D20MX
Generating a System Default Configuration for the D20MX
In the event that it is necessary to generate a system default configuration for the D20MX
(for example, the username, password or both are unavailable), this chapter provides the
procedure.
Prerequisites
Prerequisites for generating a system default configuration for the D20MX:
•
A Windows PC with SGConfig 8.1 or higher software.
•
A NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) connecting the RS232 connector on the front panel of the D20MX to the serial communications port of a
PC or terminal.
Generate a system default configuration for the
D20MX
To generate a system default configuration for the D20MX:
1.
Set up Tera Term on a PC. See “Set up Tera Term on a PC” on page 80.
2.
Restart the D20MX by turning the power off and on.
Result: The startup messages appear.
3.
When the message “Press Ctrl-F to reset to factory defaults” appears, enter Ctrl-F
within 3 seconds.
4.
Enter yes.
Result: The prompt: “Do you wish to reset to Factory Defaults (yes/no)?:” appears
Be sure to enter the whole word “yes”, not just “y”.
Result: This causes the configuration to be defaulted and the password file to be
deleted. The system reboots and eventually the “User:” prompt appears.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
117
CHAPTER 9: GENERATING A SYSTEM DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR THE D20MX
5.
Login with the username recover and password system.
6.
You may now synchronize a configuration to the D20MX using SGConfig.
Result: The D20M> prompt appears.
118
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 10: Removing Configuration
Data and Sensitive Information from
the D20MX
Removing Configuration Data and Sensitive Information from the D20MX
In the event that it is necessary to remove the configuration data and sensitive information
from the D20MX (for example, disposal purposes), this chapter provides the procedure.
It may also be necessary to remove data from a PC that has run ConfigPro or SGConfig for
the purpose of configuring a D20MX processor. Again, this chapter provides the data
removal procedure.
Remove configuration data and sensitive
information from the D20MX
Prerequisites
Prerequisites for removing configuration data and sensitive information from the D20MX:
•
A Windows PC with SGConfig 8.1 or higher software.
•
A NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) connecting the RS232 connector on the front panel of the D20MX to the serial communications port of a
PC or terminal.
Removal Procedure
To remove configuration data and sensitive information from the flash file system and
NVRAM of the D20MX:
If you wish only to return the D20MX to a system default state and do not need to
securely wipe previous configuration information from the flash file system, refer to
Chapter 9, Generating a System Default Configuration for the D20MX.
NOTE
1.
Set up Tera Term on a PC. See “Set up Tera Term on a PC” on page 80.
2.
Restart the D20MX by turning the power off and on.
Result: The startup messages appear.
3.
Wait for the following messages to appear and press Ctrl-E:
Application version: v1.50Firmware: SAN0001.150/SAN0002.150
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
119
CHAPTER 10: REMOVING CONFIGURATION DATA AND SENSITIVE INFORMATION FROM THE D20MX
Press Ctrl-F to reset to factory defaults.
3 2 1
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO THIS DEVICE IS PROHIBITED
You must have explicit permission to access or configure this device.
All activities may be logged. Violations of policy governing this device
may result in disciplinary action and may be reported to law enforcement.
There is no right to privacy in accessing this device.
Press Ctrl-E to enter debug mode
1 2 3
Result: You are prompted to login.
4.
Login as a user with maintenance access or higher (e.g., Engineer role).
Result: You are logged in and the D20M Shell is started.
Result: You are prompted to continue.
Please Wait... 1
Press Enter to Continue...
5.
Press Enter.
Result: The D20M Shell prompt appears.
6.
Type the command SFD (Secure Factory Default) and press Enter.
D20M> SFD
Result: The SFD command runs.
Result: You are prompted to continue.
This command permanently deletes the configuration.
Are you sure you wish to continue?[y]
7.
If you wish to continue, type y and press Enter.
Result: The SFD command will continue.
Result: The SFD command:
(A) Shuts down certain tasks,
(B) Clears NVRAM,
(C) Sets up JMON commands to resume the SFD command in case there is a
power failure during the procedure,
(D) Erases the '/user' volume (customer files),
(E) Removes the JMON command,
(F) Reformats the '/user' volume,
(G) Checks the'/tffs0' volume, and reboots.
A) Shutting down tasks...
WARNING: Could not shut down 'B003'
WARNING: Could not shut down 'ROOT'
Done
B) Clearing NVRAM... Done
deleting file /user/pkey_db/default_rsa
deleting file /user/pkey_db/default_dsa
deleting directory /user/pkey_db
C) Setting Power-fail JMON commands...
Set 'AUTOBOOT_WARM_CMD_00' = 'fle 1 512 896'
Set 'AUTOBOOT_WARM_CMD_01' = 'setenv AUTOBOOT_COLD_CMD_00 efn'
Set 'AUTOBOOT_WARM_CMD_02' = 'saveenv'
Set 'AUTOBOOT_WARM_CMD_03' = 'boot'
Set 'AUTOBOOT_WARM_CMD_04' = ''
Set 'AUTOBOOT_COLD_CMD_00' = 'warmboot'
.. Done
120
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 10: REMOVING CONFIGURATION DATA AND SENSITIVE INFORMATION FROM THE D20MX
D) Erasing '/user' Volume...
Erasing 384 blocks.
1)
0K
256K
512K
768K
5)
1024K
1280K
1536K
1792K
. . . .
377) 96256K
96512K
96768K
97024K
381) 97280K
97536K
97792K
98048K
Erase Complete.
Erase time:06:04.617s
.. Done
E) Removing Power-fail JMON commands...
Set 'AUTOBOOT_COLD_CMD_00' = 'efn'
Set 'AUTOBOOT_WARM_CMD_00' = ''
Set 'AUTOBOOT_WARM_CMD_01' = ''
Set 'AUTOBOOT_WARM_CMD_02' = ''
Set 'AUTOBOOT_WARM_CMD_03' = ''
.. Done
F) Reformatting '/user'...
* Steps 1 of 3) TFFS Formatting (*This takes approximately 7
minutes)...
* Steps 2 of 3) Mounting '/user'...
. . . .
* Steps 3 of 3) HRFS Formatting ...
. . . .
No errors detected.
Volume OK.
.. Done
G) Volume '/tffs0' already formatted as DOS: No change required
*** Phase 1) Set Customer File location: '/user'
*** Phase 2) Rebooting...
Result: The sensitive customer files have been completely erased from the file system.
And the NVRAM has been cleared. A default configuration has been generated and
installed.
Result: The D20MX reboots. Since the configuration has been defaulted, the D20MX is
in debug mode.
Removing configuration data on a PC
If ConfigPro or SGConfig have been used to configure the D20MX processor, configuration
data resides on the data storage media (e.g., hard drives, memory cards, etc.) of the PC
running ConfigPro or SGConfig.
The D20MX configuration data can be removed from the PC by either:
•
Recommended: Physically removing and destroying the data storage media, or
•
Using a program to securely wipe (that is, completely erase) the data storage media
(that is, not just reformat or remove the names of the files from the file allocation
table).
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
121
CHAPTER 10: REMOVING CONFIGURATION DATA AND SENSITIVE INFORMATION FROM THE D20MX
122
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter 11: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes how to troubleshoot:
•
Serial communicationsGE Grid Solutions
•
Firmware version mismatches
•
D20MX Shell commands
•
D20MX Logs
Troubleshooting serial communications
This section describes how to troubleshoot serial communications using SA COM.
A serial analyzer captures and displays serial communications in hexadecimal format to
assist in troubleshooting communications between an IED or SCADA master and the D20.
GE Grid Solutions has incorporated this powerful feature into the firmware of the D20MX
via the SA COM (Serial Analyze Communications) command, allowing for the capture of
serial communications from any of the serial ports.
Serial analyzer
A serial analyzer displays every character (including framing and parity errors) of the raw
communication between an RTU and IEDs in the field or a SCADA master station. Test sets
do not always display all of the data, as they normally parse the data and if there is a
problem, that message is ignored.
Normally a serial analyzer is used to verify communications between two or more devices
to see if a correct response is sent for a particular request. The captured messages can
then be parsed and examined for their integrity. Any problems with the request or
response can then be analyzed. In the case of when a device fails or does not respond, the
serial analyzer may have captured the message that triggered the problem. It will also
show the quality of the communications link by displaying any noise, framing errors (FR),
parity errors (PA) or echoes in the message.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
123
CHAPTER 11: TROUBLESHOOTING
Prerequisites
The following items are required:
•
A NULL modem cable (GE part number 977-0529) connecting the RS-232 connector
on the front panel of the D20MX to the serial communications port of the PC.
•
Windows* PC running a terminal emulator (e.g., TeraTerm Pro) that has a log-to-file
feature.
Procedure
The procedure below assumes that TeraTerm Pro is being used as the terminal emulator.
The steps may differ slightly if a different terminal emulator program is used.
To capture a serial analysis file:
1.
Connect the computer's serial communications port to the WESMAINT port of the D20
using the WESMAINT cable.
2.
Select Serial and the appropriate COM port for the computer, and then click OK.
3.
Press Enter and a log in screen is shown. Type in your user name and password and
press Enter.
4.
The Main Menu is shown. Use the down arrow key to select option 2. System Functions
and then press Enter (or press the number 2 key on the keyboard).
5.
The System Functions menu is shown. Use the down arrow to select option 3. SHELL
and then press Enter (or press the number 3 key on the keyboard).
6.
Before starting to capture a serial analysis file, it is recommended to increase the
WESMAINT baud rate so that the display buffer does not overflow. A display buffer
overflow will occur when the data is coming in faster than WESMAINT can display it.
A communications port running at a higher baud rate than the WESMAINT port
usually causes this. Examples of buffer overflow are shown at the end of this
document.
To change the baud rate, type baud xxxxx (where xxxxx is the desired baud rate for
your device) at the system prompt and press Enter. Type baud by itself and the
available baud rates are displayed.
The recommended baud rate is 115200.
7.
Change the baud rate in the terminal emulator to match the baud rate selected in the
previous step. If using TeraTerm, click Setup > Serial port and then change the baud
rate and change the flow control to none. Click OK and press Enter to get the system
prompt to appear.
8.
Before starting to log data, a log file must be created.
If using TeraTerm:
124
8.1.
Click File menu > Log.
8.2.
Type in or select a file to log to.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 11: TROUBLESHOOTING
9.
8.3.
Select a folder to store it in so it can easily be located later.
8.4.
Click Open when finished.
Type sa comx (where comx is the communications port name you want to monitor)
and then press Enter. The naming convention is described in “Port names used with
SGConfig and ConfigPro” on page 108.
Result: The D20 messages always appear in inverse text (white text on a black
background) and the master request or the slave response always appears in regular
text (black text on a white background).
Master
D20/D200 response
D20/D200 response
Master
In this example the D20 is acting as the slave and information is being sent out from
the D20 in inverse text. To stop the capture when the appropriate data has been
captured, press CTRL-C to return to the system prompt.
10. When the data capture is finished, close the log file in TeraTerm by clicking Close.
11. The log file can now be found in the folder it was stored in and can be opened using a
text editor. The file can be parsed by copying this information into a computer-based
automated parser or done manually by using a protocol description document.
If using Notepad to view the contents of the log file, all of the communications traffic
is shown in non-formatted text.
NOTE
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
125
CHAPTER 11: TROUBLESHOOTING
Advanced Analyzer Options
The SA command has several options for advanced communication analysis.
•
Sync on receive (/SR): When a transition from sending bytes to receiving occurs, the
received bytes start on a new line.
•
Sync on Transmit (/ST): When a transition from receiving bytes to sending bytes
occurs, the sent bytes start on a new line.
•
Driver Events (/D): Display serial I/O driver events such as the RTS, CTS or DCD signal
line transitions. Discarded bytes due to DCD squelching. See the D20MX Shell Users
guide for a complete listing of driver events.
•
Display the bytes in ASCII (/A): The data is displayed as ASCII characters instead of
hexadecimal values.
•
Display Width (/Wnn): Set the width of the display, where nn is from 5 to 50 (default is
25). Will have to adjust the width of the TeraTerm window.
Buffer Overflow
The below screen shows good serial communications data at the top of the screen and
transitions to show buffer overflows at the bottom of the screen. When the buffer
overflows the message 'SA Buffer Overflow - data lost. Increase console baud rate.' is
displayed.
126
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 11: TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting firmware version mismatches
The D20MX checks the application version in the firmware against the Firmware Type
(Application Definition) version every time it boots. If a discrepancy is detected a message
is logged in the kernel error log. If the application with a version discrepancy is disabled,
only a WARNING message is logged. If the application is enabled, then a FATAL message is
logged and the D20MX enters disabled mode. All applications in the configuration are
checked; the check does not stop at the first FATAL application.
The message includes the:
•
Application number (e.g., A009N),
•
Firmware/Application Definition version (e.g., CFG:811) and
•
Application version (e.g., FW:812).
If the application version (FW) shows '<ukn>', then the firmware in the D20MX does not
contain that application, yet there is a configuration for it.
Use the D20M Shell command EL to view these messages.
Example warning messages:
D20MX> EL
05/28/2015
05/28/2015
05/28/2015
05/28/2015
11:19:01>WARNING:
11:19:01>WARNING:
11:19:01>WARNING:
11:19:01>* FATAL:
ApplDef
ApplDef
ApplDef
ApplDef
ver
ver
ver
ver
mismatch:'A009N' (CFG:811, FW:812)
mismatch:'A064' (CFG:110, FW:<ukn>)
mismatch:'A199-0N' (CFG:111, FW:112)
mismatch:'B152-1N' (CFG:300, FW:<ukn>)
In this example the D20MX entered disabled mode because there a FATAL mismatch
occurred with 'B152-1N'.
To resolve any FATAL or WARNING issues, either update the configuration to match the
firmware or update the firmware to match the configuration.
To update the:
•
Configuration, refer to the procedure “To transfer a D20 or D200 device configuration
to the D20MX:” on page 94.
•
Firmware, refer to the procedure “Download image files to the D20MX” on page 79.
D20MX Shell commands
This section outlines some of the D20MX Shell commands that can be used when working
with the D20MX processor. Instructions in this chapter are excerpts from the D20MX Shell
User's Guide.
Refer to the D20MX Shell User's Guide (SWM0074) for information about other commands
not listed here.
Changing the baud rate
The D20MX Shell has the ability to change the communication speed of the WESMAINT
port. This is useful when downloading large files.
Example: A 1 MB code file may take upwards of 40 minutes to download at 9600 bps (the
default). At 38400 bps, the transfer is only 10 - 15 minutes.
Most PCs cannot exceed 115,200 bps, and some terminal programs (Windows Terminal for
example) may have other restrictions. Check the program's User's Guide for help.
NOTE
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
127
CHAPTER 11: TROUBLESHOOTING
SET BAUD RATE command
The SET BAUD RATE command changes the data rate of the WESMAINT port to a usersupplied value.
Command Format
BAUD baud_rate
Variables
None
Parameters
baud_rate = the new data rate for the port, in bps.
Example
Type BAUD 4800 and press ENTER.
Result:
The monitor switches to communicate at 4800 bps.
Special Considerations
See Notice below.
Speed changes made using the SET BAUD RATE command are not saved in NVRAM; the
monitor returns to 9600 bps after a restart. It is recommended that this command only be
used to speed up a serial download, and not to redefine the operational state.
Supported data speeds
The supported data rates, in bps, are:
128
•
900
•
1050
•
1200
•
1800
•
2000
•
2400
•
3600
•
4800
•
7200
•
9600
•
14400
•
19200
•
28800
•
38400
•
57600
•
115200
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 11: TROUBLESHOOTING
D20MX logging
The D20MX provides two logs that are useful for troubleshooting issues:
•
WESMAINT Error Log
•
Kernel Error Log.
WESMAINT error log
The WESMAINT Error Log stores informational, error, warning, and fatal error messages
generated by the system. Refer to B014-1NUG WESMAINT II+ for the D20MX User's Guide
for more information.
Most messages logged to the WESMAINT Error Log by an application are described in the
application's Configuration Guide For information on messages not available in a
Configuration Guide, refer to Appendix H, WESMAINT Error Log Messages.
Kernel error log
The Kernel Error Log stores low-level system messages typically required only by GE Grid
SolutionsTechnical Support to assist with problem diagnosis.
View the Kernel Error Log by typing el in the D20MX Shell. Also refer to SWM0080 D20MX
Shell User's Guide.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
129
CHAPTER 11: TROUBLESHOOTING
130
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Chapter A: Default Role-Based
Access Control Model
Default Role-Based Access Control Model
Configured roles in the D20MX
When you configure the D20MX to use RADIUS, the D20MX must be configured with a set
of roles in the B014 RADIUS Roles Table (B014RADR) of the WESMAINT II+ application (Refer
to the B014-1NCG WESMAINT II+ for the D20MX Configuration Guide for more information).
The role is identified by a role ID, which is an integer number provided by the RADIUS
server.
The D20MX Default configurations D20MX01-XX and D20MX02-XX include a default rolebased access control model that meets the general rules shown in Table 27.
Table 27: General access control rules
Description
Administrator Engineer Operator Observer
(2)
(1)
(3)
(0)
Can Change Passwords
Yes
No
No
No
Can Clear the Login Buffer
No
No
No
No
Can Change SCADA Settings
Yes
Yes
No
No
Can Download Firmware
Yes
Yes
No
No
Can Perform Operational Control (e.g. breaker
operation)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Can View Operational Data
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Can Access Low Level “C” Shell
Yes
No
No
No
The Shell access level roles are provided in Table 28
Table 28: Shell access level
Description
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Access Level
Read/Write
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
Maintenance Read Only Read Only
131
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
The specific flags defined in the Application Control field of the RADIUS Roles table are
provided in the tables listed in Table 29.
Table 29: List of configured roles
132
Table Number Access
Flags For...
Associated
Application #
Table 30
Modify
WESMAINT
14
Table 31
Read
Table 32
Modify
D20AC WESMAINT II+ Display Screens
32045
Table 33
Read
Table 34
Modify
Prologic display
36
Table 35
Read
Table 36
Modify
DNP DPA Configuration Display
32021
Table 37
Read
Table 38
Modify
Internet Statistics Display
162
Table 39
Read
Table 40
Modify
DNP Serial Data Link Display
32013
Table 41
Read
Table 42
Modify
Modbus DCA Display
59
Table 43
Read
Table 44
Modify
Modbus DPA Display
68
Table 45
Read
Table 46
Modify
File Upload Interface
32071
Table 47
Read
Table 48
Modify
SOE Logger
27
Table 49
Read
Table 50
Modify
SEL DCA
78
Table 51
Read
Table 52
Modify
IEC 60870-5-101/104 DPA
101
Table 53
Read
Table 54
Modify
Landis & Gyr 8979 DPA
185
Table 55
Read
Table 56
Modify
Harris 6000/XA-21 DPA
199
Table 57
Read
Table 58
Modify
IEC 60870-5 FT1.2 Balanced Data Link
32085
Table 59
Read
Table 60
Modify
Modify access flags for DNP V1.00 Data Link
17
Table 61
Read
Table 62
Modify
Quantum Meter Scanner DCA
18
Table 63
Read
Table 64
Modify
CDC Type 1 DPA
23
Table 65
Read
Table 66
Modify
PID DTA
41
Table 67
Read
Table 68
Modify
MODBUS TCP DCA
131
Table 69
Read
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
Table Number Access
Flags For...
Associated
Application #
Table 70
Modify
MODBUS TCP DPA
135
Table 71
Read
Table 72
Modify
LogicLinx DTA
32082
Table 73
Read
Table 74
Modify
PML 3710 DCA Display
74
Table 75
Read
Table 76
Modify
Courier DCA Display
98
Table 77
Read
Table 30: Modify access flags for WESMAINT (Application number: 14)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operator Observer
(2)
(1)
(3)
(0)
0
Time and Date display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1
Peripheral Status display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
2
Peripheral Status Detail display
Yes
Yes
No
No
3
COS Buffer display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
4
SHELL
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
5
Digital Inputs display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
6
Digital Inputs Detail display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
7
Digital Outputs display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
8
Digital Outputs Detail display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
9
Analog Inputs display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
10
Analog Inputs Detail display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
11
Analog Outputs display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
12
Analog Outputs Detail display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
13
Transition Counter display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
14
Transition Counter Detailed display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
15
SOE Buffer display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
16
USER LOG display
Yes
No
No
No
17
Database Synch display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
18
Switch-over display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
19
System Status display
Yes
Yes
No
No
20
Communication Status display
Yes
Yes
No
No
21
Complex Object display
Yes
Yes
No
No
22
Complex Object Detail display
Yes
Yes
No
No
23
Generic Data display
Yes
Yes
No
No
24
Generic Data Detail display
Yes
Yes
No
No
25 - 31
Not used.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Table 31: Read access flags for WESMAINT (Application number: 14)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operator Observer
(2)
(1)
(3)
(0)
0
Time and Date display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Peripheral Status display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Peripheral Status Detail display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3
COS Buffer display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
133
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operator Observer
(2)
(1)
(3)
(0)
4
SHELL
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5
Digital Inputs display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6
Digital Inputs Detail display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
7
Digital Outputs display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8
Digital Outputs Detail display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
9
Analog Inputs display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10
Analog Inputs Detail display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
11
Analog Outputs display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
12
Analog Outputs Detail display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
13
Transition Counter display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
14
Transition Counter Detailed display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
15
SOE Buffer display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
16
USER LOG display
Yes
Yes
No
No
17
Database Synch display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
18
Switch-over display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
19
System Status display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
20
Communication Status display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
21
Complex Object display
Yes
Yes
No
No
22
Complex Object Detail display
Yes
Yes
No
No
23
Generic Data display
Yes
Yes
No
No
24
Generic Data Detail display
Yes
Yes
No
No
25-31
Not used.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Table 32: Modify access flags for D20AC WESMAINT II+ display screens (Application
number: 32045)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator
(2)
Engineer Operator Observer
(1)
(3)
(0)
0-31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 33: Read access flags for D20AC WESMAINT II+ display screens (Application number: 32045)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
(2)
(1)
r (3)
(0)
0
D20 AC Main Menu
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Circuit Display Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Circuit Configuration Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3
D20 AC Configuration Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4 – 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 34: Modify access flags for Prologic display (Application number: 36)
134
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operator
(2)
(1)
(3)
Observer
(0)
0-31
Yes
No
Not Used
GE INFORMATION
Yes
Yes
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
Table 35: Read access flags for Prologic display (Application number: 36)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator
(2)
Engineer Operator Observer
(1)
(3)
(0)
0
Connect to Prologic Editor
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1
Request Control of Port
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
2 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 36: Modify access flags for DNP DPA configuration display (Application number:
32021)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0-23
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
24
Modify Points / Detail Displays
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
25-31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 37: Read access flags for DNP DPA configuration display (Application number:
32021)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
DNP DPA Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1-22
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
23
Configuration Pages
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
24
Detail Pages
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
25 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 38: Modify access flags for internet statistics display (Application number: 162)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0-31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 39: Read access flags for internet statistics display (Application number: 162)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 40: Modify access flags for DNP serial data link display (Application number:
32013)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0-31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 41: Read access flags for DNP serial data link display (Application number: 32013)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
135
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
Table 42: Modify access flags for Modbus DCA display (Application number: 59)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0-31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 43: Read access flags for Modbus DCA display (Application number: 59)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 44: Modify access flags for Modbus DPA display (Application number: 68)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0-31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 45: Read access flags for Modbus DPA display (Application number: 68)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 46: Modify access flags for file upload interface (Application number: 32071)
Bit
Description
Position
0-31
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Not Used
Yes
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
Yes
Yes
No
Table 47: Read access flags for file upload interface (Application number: 32071)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
yes
No
Table 48: Modify access flags for SOE Logger (Application number: 27)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0-31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 49: Read access flags for SOE Logger (Application number: 27)
136
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
Table 50: Modify access flags for SEL DCA (Application number: 78)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0-1
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
2
Gateway access to serial port
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
3 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 51: Read access flags for SEL DCA (Application number: 78))
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
2
Show relay level 1 password
Yes
Yes
No
No
3
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
4
Show relay level 2 password
Yes
Yes
No
No
5-7
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
8
Show MUX level 1 password
Yes
Yes
No
No
9-31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 52: Modify access flags for IEC 60870-5-101/104 DPA (Application number: 101)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
[2]
[1]
r [3]
[0]
0
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 53: Read access flags for IEC 60870-5-101/104 DPA (Application number: 101)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
[2]
[1]
r [3]
[0]
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 54: Modify access flags for Landis & Gyr 8979 DPA (Application number: 185)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
[2]
[1]
r [3]
[0]
0
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1
Force / Unforce Point, Delete All or
Delete to Cursor in SOE Log Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
2
Freeze Accumulator
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
3 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 55: Read access flags for Landis & Gyr 8979 DPA (Application number: 185)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
[2]
[1]
r [3]
[0]
0
Main Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Analog Input Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
ADC Reference Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3
Indication, SOE or Digital Input Display Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4
Accumulator Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Yes
GE INFORMATION
137
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
[2]
[1]
r [3]
[0]
5
SOE Log Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6
Analog Output Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
7
Digital Output Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8
LRU Configuration Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9
Cross References Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 56: Modify access flags for Harris 6000/XA-21 DPA (Application number: 199)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
[2]
[1]
r [3]
[0]
0
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
2
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
3
Force Digital Output (Digital Output
Display)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
4
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
5
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
6
Force Analog Output (Analog Output
Display)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
7
Force R/L Output (R/L Outputs Display) Yes
Yes
Yes
No
8
Delete All COS (COS Display)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
9
Delete All SOE (SOE Display)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
10 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 57: Read access flags for Harris 6000/XA-21 DPA (Application number: 199)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
[2]
[1]
r [3]
[0]
0
Main Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Port Assignment and Cross References Yes
Displays
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Current Status Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3
Digital Output Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4
Accumulator Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5
Analog Input Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6
Analog Output Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
7
R/L Outputs Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8
COS Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9
SOE Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 58: Modify access flags for IEC 60870-5 FT1.2 Balanced Data Link (Application
number: 32085)
138
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
[2]
[1]
r [3]
[0]
0
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
Table 59: Read access flags for IEC 60870-5 FT1.2 Balanced Data Link (Application number: 32085)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer Operato Observer
[2]
[1]
r [3]
[0]
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 60: Modify access flags for DNP V1.00 Data Link (Application number: 17)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Update counters in the DNP Comm.
Statistics Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 61: Read access flags for DNP V1.0 Data Link (Application number: 17)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
DNP Comm. Statistics Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 62: Modify access flags for Quantum Meter Scanner DCA (Application number: 18)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0-1
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
2
Update counters in Quantum Meter
Status Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 63: Read access flags for Quantum Meter Scanner DCA (Application number: 18)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Quantum Function Menu
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
Quantum Meter Data Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Quantum Meter Status Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 64: Modify access flags for CDC Type 1 DPA (Application number: 23)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0 - 31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
Yes
No
139
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
Table 65: Read access flags for CDC Type 1 DPA (Application number: 23)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Main Menu
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1-8
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
9
Accumulators Display,
Analog Inputs Display,
Direct Analog Outputs Display,
SBO Analog Outputs Display,
Direct Controls Display,
SBO Controls Display,
Status Inputs Display,
Direct Setpoints Display, and
SBO Setpoints Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
10 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 66: Modify access flags for PID DTA (Application number: 41)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0 - 31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 67: Read access flags for PID DTA (Application number: 41))
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any page
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 68: Modify access flags for the MODBUS TCP DCA (Application number: 131)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0 - 31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 69: Read access flags for the MODBUS TCP DCA (Application number: 131)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 70: Modify access flags for the MODBUS TCP DPA (Application number: 135)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0 - 31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 71: Read access flags for the MODBUS TCP DPA (Application number: 135)
140
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
Table 72: Modify access flags for the LogicLinx DTA (Application number: 32082)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
SSH Port Forward Connect
Yes
Yes
No
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 73: Read access flags for the LogicLinx DTA (Application number: 32082)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
WESMAINT Connect
Yes
Yes
No
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 74: Modify access flags for PML 3710 DCA (Application number: 74)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0 - 31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 75: Read access flags for PML 3710 DCA (Application number: 74)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Table 76: Modify access flags for Courier DCA (Application number: 98)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0 - 31
Yes
Yes
Not Used
Yes
No
Table 77: Read access flags for Courier DCA (Application number: 98)
Bit
Description
Position
Administrator Engineer
(2)
(1)
Operator Observer
(3)
(0)
0
Any Page
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 - 31
Not Used
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
141
CHAPTER A: DEFAULT ROLE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL
142
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Appendix B: Standards & Protection
Standards & Protection
This Appendix lists the standards with which the D20 have been tested for compliance.
Compliance standards
Compliance standards are listed for the following categories:
•
Emission standards; see Table 78
•
Immunity standards; see Table 79
•
Safety publications; see Table 80
•
Environmental standards; see Table 81
Table 78: Emission standards
Standard Name
Description
EN55011 (CISPR 11)1
ISM RF equipment – Electromagnetic Radiated Emissions 30 MHz to 1 GHz
disturbance characteristics
Conducted Emissions 150 kHz –
30 MHz
D20 Test Specification
Table 79: Immunity standards
Standard Name
Description
D20 Test Specification
IEC 61000-4-2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
immunity test
Contact Discharge: 8 kV
Air Discharge: 15 kV
HCP and VCP: 8 kV
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 61850-3: clause 5.7.2
Radiated, radio-frequency
electromagnetic field immunity test
80 MHz to 1 GHz: 10V/m
1.4 GHz to 2 GHz: 3V/m
2 GHz to 3 GHz: 1V/m
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 61850-3: clause 5.7.1.4
Electrical fast transient/burst
immunity test
Direct Couple: 4 kV/5 kHz
Capacitive Clamp: 2 kV/5 kHz
IEC 61000-4-5
Surge immunity test
Power port 2kV
Signal port 2kV
IEC 61000-4-6
Immunity to conducted disturbances, 150 kHz to 80 MHz: 10Vrms
induced by radio-frequency fields
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
143
APPENDIX B: STANDARDS & PROTECTION
Standard Name
Description
D20 Test Specification
IEC 60255-22-1
1 MHz burst immunity test
Pass
IEC 61000-4-8
Power frequency magnetic field
immunity test
100A/m @ 180s
1000A/m @ 3s
IEC 61000-4-12
Ring wave
Pass
IEC 61000-4-11
Voltage dips, short interruptions and
voltage variations immunity tests
Pass
IEC 61000-4-16
IEC 61850-3: clause 5.7.1.3
Test for immunity to conducted,
common mode disturbances in the
frequency range 0 Hz to 150 kHz
30Vrms, 300Vrms
IEC 61000-4-17
Ripple on DC input power port
immunity test
Pass
IEC 61000-4-29+
Voltage dips, short interruptions and Pass
voltage variations on DC input power
port immunity test
This standard only applies when using
high voltage DC as the source
(100 V DC to300 V DC).
Table 80: Safety publications
Standard Name
Description
IEC 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control and
laboratory use - General requirements
D20 Test Specification
IEC 60255-5
Insulation coordination for measuring
relays and protection equipmentRequirements and tests
Dielectric and Resistance
measurements not applicable
due to design (TVS in circuit)
Table 81: Environmental standards
Standard Name
Description
D20 Test Specification
IEC 60068-2-1
Cold
96 hours powered at - 20 °C
IEC 60068-2-2
Dry Heat
96 hours powered at + 70 °C
IEC 60068-2-6
Vibration (sinusoidal)
A logarithmic sweep from 10 Hz to 150 Hz to
10 Hz at 1 oct/min for 1 sweep cycle in the 3
orthogonal axes.
Acceleration level 1 g
IEC 60068-2-27
Shock - Operating Response
Test
Shock - Non-Operating
Withstand Test
- Operating Response Test: Acceleration
level: 5 g's
- Non-Operating Withstand Test:
Acceleration level: 15 g's
3 pulses per polarity per axis for a total of 18
pulses
IEC 60068-2-29
Bump – Non operating test
10g peak, 1000 pulses per polarity per axis
for a total of 6000 pulses
IEC 60068-2-30
Damp heat, cyclic (12 h + 12 h
cycle)
96 hours humidity at +25 °C / +55 °C at 95%
RH
IEC 60068-2-31
Drop and topple
50 mm drop on 4 edges and 4 faces
IEC 60068-2-78
Humidity Testing
96 hours steady state humidity at 40 °C and
93% RH
1 To comply, the ferrite clamp (460-0073) supplied must be installed on the power cable.
144
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Appendix C: Frequently Asked
Questions
Frequently Asked Questions
This appendix answers some frequently and commonly asked D20MX questions:
•
Why is a D20MX RTU important?
•
How does configuration storage work in the D20MX?
•
Why does the D20MX use the Vxworks Operating System instead of pSOS?
•
Is the D20MX hardware backward compatible?
•
Are the PCOMMON versions compatible with the D20MX?
•
What is the recommended operating temperature range of the D20MX?
•
What software application is used to configure a D20MX configuration?
•
Can you migrate an old D20/D200 configuration to D20MX?
•
What comprises a typical D20MX firmware upgrade?
•
How do you upgrade the low-level firmware components of a D20MX?
•
Can you migrate an old D20/D200 configuration to D20MX?
•
What comprises a typical D20MX firmware upgrade?
•
How do you upgrade the low-level firmware components of a D20MX?
•
Is Active Directory integration possible?
•
How are communications authenticated?
•
How are communication authorized?
•
Are communications encrypted?
•
If remote management/configuration is possible, how is it secured?
•
Describe steps taken to harden the system?
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
145
APPENDIX C: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Questions and answers
Q:
Why is a D20MX RTU important?
A:
The D20MX is being introduced for the following reasons:
–
Some electronic components used in the D20 products have reached their endof-life; For example, the 68EC030 CPU in the D20ME II and D20ME boards.
–
VXworks is the new operating system for the D20MX; this is more robust for D20
applications.
–
The D20MX offers Cyber Security features that are intended for critical
infrastructure protection within the power system. This is required for Electric
Reliability Compliance.
–
The D20MX is a modern platform that is capable of handling current and future
processing needs, particularly for security.
–
The D20MX has 1 GB of RAM, compared to 1 MB RAM in the D20ME.
–
The D20MX has 16 MB of built-in NVRAM, compared to the 512 KB of NVRAM
available in its predecessor. Subsequently, there is no need for additional memory
expansion modules.
–
The firmware flash memory size in the D20MX is 128 MB, compared to the 2 MB of
its predecessor.
–
The D20MX uses a Super Capacitor which allows the system clock to be saved for
14-days even after power off.
Q:
How does configuration storage work in the D20MX?
A:
The Super capacitor strictly allows the retention of the system clock time for 14-days.
At power-up, the configuration resides in the RAM. At power-down, configuration
resides in the flash. This is possible due to the seamless transaction between the RAM
and flash. This arrangement protects the D20MX configuration from being lost, even
after power-down for an indefinite period of time.
Q:
Why does the D20MX use the Vxworks Operating System instead of pSOS?
A:
Vxworks is designed for mission critical systems. It is purpose-fit, extremely robust
and fast. It is industry-focused and designed from the ground-up to be a real-time
operating system. It is the new operating system of choice for numerous embedded
systems that require a high level of robustness.
A:
Embedded systems manufacturers are moving away from the pSOS operating
system since on-going support for this operating system is very limited.
Q:
Is the D20MX hardware backward compatible?
A:
The D20MX hardware is compatible with the I/O modules installed in the field.
A:
Due to aging printed circuit board assembly and mechanical constraints, only certain
chassis from 2002 and onward can be used with a D20MX. This comprises the
following chassis:
–
D20 VME chassis 500-0280 Release 16A or higher
For the VME chassis 500-0280, the zero volt cable supplied with the D20MX KIT,
must be connected from the zero volt TB2 terminal block on the 517-0225 to zero
volt on the 517-0123. Review the hardware manual for the steps involved. Part
number for the zero volt wire cable is 975-1237.
–
146
D20 Non-VME chassis 500-0305 Release 26 or higher
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX C: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q:
Are the PCOMMON versions compatible with the D20MX?
A:
The following PCOMMON versions are compatible with the D20MX:
–
P022 v3.05 and 3.00: PCOMMON for D20C
Note: v3.05 is required if fiber optic repeaters / splitters are used.
–
P010 v3.06, 3.05, 3.01 and 3.00: PCOMMON for D20A, D20S and D20K
–
P087 v1.04, 1.03 and 1.02: pBOOT for D20AC
A:
Also see the PCOMMON versions compatible with the D20MX in Table 13 on page 59.
Q:
What is the recommended operating temperature range of the D20MX?
A:
The operating temperature range is 0°C to +70°C.
Note: Do not operate the D20MX above 60°C for extended periods of time as this
shortens the life of the super capacitor and reduces the backup time of the real time
clock.
Q:
What software application is used to configure a D20MX configuration?
A:
The SGConfig (version 8.1 or higher) offline configuration tool is used to configure the
D20MX. SGConfig is similar to ConfigPro which is used to program its predecessor.
Q:
Can you migrate an old D20/D200 configuration to D20MX?
A:
ConfigPro is partly used to get the D20 device configuration ready for migration into
the SGConfig tool.
A:
It is recommended to migrate a project rather than a device to prevent partial loss of
configuration data related to Ethernet/LAN.
A:
For detailed migration steps, see section “Transfer existing D20 or D200
configurations to the D20MX” on page 93.
Q:
What comprises a typical D20MX firmware upgrade?
A:
Typically a firmware upgrade of the D20MX involves only the operating system and
application firmware images, which are transferred by SFTP.
Q:
How do you upgrade the low-level firmware components of a D20MX?
A:
To upgrade the low-level firmware components (i.e., Bootrom, FPGA or JMON) of a
D20MX run a TFTP client from the JMON prompt of the D20MX. Upgrading of these
low-level firmware components is seldom required.
Q:
Is Active Directory integration possible?
A:
Yes. Since the D20MX supports RADIUS, the D20MX can be integrated with Active
Directory through the Microsoft RADIUS Servers: Network Policy Server when using
Windows Server 2008 or 2012 or Internet Authentication Service when using
Windows Server 2003. Refer to SWM0076 or SWM0075 for details.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
147
APPENDIX C: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q:
How are communications authenticated?
A:
Network Communications
RADIUS or the local password store provides authentication for the following network
access types: Wesmaint II+ / console access, LogicLinx debugging and configuration,
firmware transfer.
Network SCADA protocols are currently not authenticated, but this is a limitation of the
protocol rather than the D20MX. Protocols such as DNP SAv5 which do provide
authentication are on the road-map for the D20MX.
A:
Serial Communications
RADIUS or the local password store provides authentication for the following serial
access types: Wesmaint II+ / console access, LogicLinx debugging and configuration/
firmware transfer.
Serial SCADA protocols are currently not authenticated, but this is a limitation of the
protocol rather than the D20MX. Protocols such as DNP SAv5 which do provide
authentication are on the road-map for the D20MX.
Q:
A:
How are communication authorized?
Network Communications
RADIUS or the local configuration user database provide authorization for the
following network access types: Wesmaint II+ / console access, LogicLinx debugging,
and configuration/firmware transfer. Authorization is provided for four roles:
Administrator, Engineer, Operator and Observer.
Authorization for network SCADA protocols is currently not provided, but this is a
limitation of the protocol rather than the D20MX. Protocols such as DNP SAv5 which
do provide authorization are on the road-map for the D20MX.
A:
Serial Communications
RADIUS or the local configuration user database provide authorization for the
following serial access types: Wesmaint II+ / console access, LogicLinx debugging and
configuration/firmware transfer. Authorization is provided for four roles: Administrator,
Engineer, Operator and Observer.
Authorization for serial SCADA protocols is currently not authenticated, but this is a
limitation of the protocol rather than the D20MX. Protocols such as DNP SAv5 which
do provide authorization are on the road-map for the D20MX.
148
Q:
Are communications encrypted?
A:
Network communication for the following network access types are encrypted:
Wesmaint II+ / console access, LogicLinx debugging, and configuration/firmware
transfer. RADIUS authentication messages are also encrypted if PEAP/EAP-TTLS is
used.
Q:
If remote management/configuration is possible, how is it secured?
A:
Remote management/configuration is possible. It is secured by means of SSH, with
Authentication/Authorization as previously described.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX C: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q:
Describe steps taken to harden the system?
A:
The system has been hardened by:
–
Performing Coverity static analysis and correcting issues on key applications.
–
Running Spirent and Wurldtech network security test suites on every release.
(Fiber D20MX model is Achilles L1 certified.)
–
Running Automatak DNP / Modbus Fuzzers on every release.
–
Regularly performing Impact assessments on published vulnerabilities. If
impacted, open/closed source is updated to address vulnerabilities and provided
in next D20MX release.
–
Enabling Operating System features that promote security such as kernel
hardening.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
149
APPENDIX C: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
150
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Appendix D: Using ConfigPro with
D20MX
Using ConfigPro with D20MX
While SGConfig is recommended for configuring and transferring a D20 configuration to
the D20MX, it is also possible to configure the D20MX using ConfigPro.
This appendix describes how to transfer a D20 configuration to the D20MX using
ConfigPro.
Refer to the “Application definition files and default configurations” on page 174 to see
how application definition files and factory default configuration files can be installed.
Using ConfigPro to configure and transfer a D20 configuration to a D20MX is done by:
•
“Transferring D20 configurations to the D20MX” on page 152
•
“Downloading a D20MX configuration” on page 165
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
151
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
Transferring D20 configurations to the D20MX
To transfer a D20 configuration to the D20MX using ConfigPro:
1.
152
Create a D20MX device.
1.1.
Right-click the D20 device.
1.2.
Select Copy….
Result: The Select Project and Page to Copy Device to window appears.
1.3.
In the Device Name field, rename the device as a D20MX device.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
2.
3.
Generate a report of the applications in the original D20 device configuration and
determine the unused applications.
2.1.
Right-click on the created D20MX device and select Reports > Application List.
Result: The Select Reports dialog appears with the Application List report
selected.
2.2.
Click Setup.
Result: The Print Setup dialog appears.
2.3.
Select a printer in the Name field if the Name field is empty.
Result: A printer is selected in the Name field.
2.4.
Click OK and OK.
Result: A new tab named Application List opens and contains the Application
List report for the original D20 device.
2.5.
Compare the Application List report with Table 2 D20MX application definitions
on page 16. With the exception of LAN Redundancy Manager (B119-1N), note
the applications that appear in Table 2 but not in the report. You may want to
print Table 2 and mark these applications. These applications are referred to as
“unused” applications in the steps to follow.
2.6.
Click the Door icon to close the Application List report.
Result: The project containing the created D20MX device reappears.
Edit the device properties of the created D20MX device so that it uses an appropriate
D20MX SAN firmware file and it has similar device properties to the desired D20MX
factory default configuration.
The D20MX SAN firmware files exist in two forms:
–
SAN0001 contains the latest versions of all applications and should be used in all
new configurations.
–
SAN0002 contains older versions of the Mailbox DTA [B009] and DNP v3.00 DPA
[B021] and is required for systems with older applications. If transferring
configurations containing B009 versions less than or equal to 310 and B021
versions less than or equal to 912, use the file SAN0002 firmware. For more
details, see Table 2, “D20MX applications,” on page 19.
3.1.
Select the factory-based D20MX configuration file to be restored.
3.1.1. Right-click the D20MX device.
3.1.2. Select Archive > Restore.
Result: The Select a Device Zip file to Restore window appears.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
153
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
3.1.3. Navigate to the factory default configuration files which were staged
previously.
The listed factory-default configuration files with a .zip extension were
built with ConfigPro.
3.2.
Select a project location to which the configuration file is to be restored.
Note: The D20MX factory default configuration files are ConfigPro 5 based. If
using ConfigPro 6 or 7, when prompted to upgrade, select Yes.
If a message indicates that a nested loop [project] is to be created, choose a
different Project directory as required: e.g., C: drive in the screen capture that
follows.
154
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
3.3.
Open the restored factory default configuration file.
3.3.1. Navigate to the project directory where the factory default configuration
was restored.
3.3.2. Open the file.
3.3.3. Use the Projects and Windows tab to switch screen content. The
Windows tab allows access to different projects.
As shown above, the device properties of the factory default
configuration MX01 uses SAN0001.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
155
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
3.3.4. Right-click on the factory default configuration's main page and select
Firmware.
3.3.5. Select the required SAN firmware and click Copy to transfer this firmware
to the project location in step 1.
This is the location of the copy of the D20 device being modified. In
step 1, this D20 device was copied and renamed as a D20MX device.
156
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
Result: The D20MX device location now has a firmware library that
contains the SAN firmware transferred from the previous step.
3.4.
Select the D20MX device created in step 1 [copied and renamed D20 device],
which is to use the intended SAN firmware in the firmware library.
3.4.1. Right-click on the D20MX device.
3.4.2. Select the Processor tab > Firmware tab > Use Firmware Type checkbox
to choose the SAN0001 firmware.
Result: The Select a Firmware Type window appears. Click OK.
3.4.3. Confirm the SAN0001/SAN0002 firmware is now associated to the
D20MX device (from step 1).
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
157
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
3.5.
Manually set the D20MX processor card.
Note: In the same device properties, the General tab does not include a D20MX
processor card.
No D20MX card
choice from this list
Need to set a manual memory map
3.5.1. Manually set the memory model in the D20MX device being modified by
selecting the Processor tab > Memory Model tab > Set Manually option.
Use the memory model settings from the factory default configuration as
a reference, See the table below.
D20MX Processor Memory Model - Set Manually
NOTE
60000000 [HEX]
EPROM Size
10000000 [HEX]
NVRAM Base
50010000 [HEX]
NVRAM Size
00FF0000 [HEX]
RAM Base
00000000 [HEX]
RAM Size
40000000 [HEX]
Step 3.6 is applicable if the device configuration were a “LAN-based Device”
configuration. LAN-based device in the device properties must first be selected under
the main General tab. It is impossible to have a LAN-based device unless the project
itself is a LAN-based project with all network addresses and settings clearly defined
for LAN A and optionally B. Step 3.6 assumes that the reader is familiar with the
complete ConfigPro LAN settings configuration steps and that these steps have
already been considered. It points out the D20MX factory default LAN-settings.
3.6.
158
EPROM Base
Set the LAN Settings.
Default LAN-Based Important Settings: Notice that the D20MX factory
default configurations are LAN-based. This is because the hardware of the
D20MX RTU has built-in LAN functionality by default. Subsequently, no extra
Media Interface Card or EME card is needed.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
3.6.1. For LAN-based D20MX configurations, ensure that the BOOTP Settings
option is disabled; select the Not Used option.
3.6.2. The Services settings highlighted below are used for remote connection
into the RTU. If not included in the Services settings, the defaults for
WesmaintSSH and CommandSSH are 22 and 922 respectively. If
included, these ports can be changed to customized numbers:
– WesmaintSSH allows remote access to the wesmaint menu.
– CommandSSH allows remote access to SFTP and the D20M shell.
These are both TCP connections.
4.
Click OK when the D20MX device properties are set.
Result: The applications present in the SAN firmware are applied to this new D20MX
device.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
159
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
5.
Carefully configure the applications of interest before generating the tables for the
D20MX device. Disable unused applications. as determined from step 2.
5.1.
In the D20MX device from step 1, disable the unused applications identified in
step 2.
In addition, disable B119-1N LAN Redundancy Manager if the device is not
LAN-based.
5.2.
Configure the WESMAINT II+ [B014-1N] and System Point Database [B008-1]
applications.
5.3.
Configure the new Wesmaint II [B014-1N] application referring to its
configuration guide. There are new tables and security settings that are
required to be configured. For complete details, refer to the D20MX
Documentation CD or extracted zip file for the B014-1N configuration guide.
5.3.1. While in the D20MX device created in step 1, double-click and go to the
System Point Database tab which contains the WESMAINT II+
application. Right-click on the RADIUS Role Table [B014RADR] and import
the B014RADR settings.
Navigate to the DVD/CD drive or the ISO Image sub-folder nested two
levels into the folder extracted from the D20MX Documentation CD zip
file. Then navigate to Configuration Files > DefaultTableSettings >
B014-1 WESMAINT II+. Select the file named B014RADR.CSV, and click
Select.
160
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
5.4.
Configure the LAN Redundancy Manager (B119-1N) application.
Note: If the LAN Redundancy Manager (B119-1N) application in the Data
Translation Applications tab is enabled, its pseudo point descriptions must be
correctly set. Complete the following steps to ensure this.
5.4.1. Go to the D20MX device being modified. Double-click the device.
Navigate to the System point database Applications tab. Double-click
the System Point Database application. Select the LAN Redundancy
Manager from the list of applications. Click Descriptors. Click the Import
icon.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
161
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
5.4.2. Click OK. Then, navigate to the DVD/CD drive or the ISO Image sub-folder
nested two levels into the folder extracted from the D20MX
Documentation CD zip file. Then, navigate to Configuration Files >
DefaultPointDescriptions > B119-1N LAN Redundancy Manager. Select
DIDESC.TXT and click Select.
5.4.3. Confirm the pseudo point descriptions changed as shown below. Click OK
to accept the change and to close each window.
5.4.4. Carefully configure all other enabled applications based on their
respective configuration guides. This is required before a configuration
can be successfully generated without errors.
162
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
5.4.5. Right-click the device and generate all the tables of the device. Carefully
review and resolve all error and warnings.
Note: A red dot on a device indicates that the device's tables need to be
generated. Unresolved errors makes the red dot remains
5.4.6. Open up the device and go to the WESMAINT II+ application to compare
the RADIUS Role [RADR] tables in the factory default D20MX device with
that in the newly modified D20MX device. Compare the first two columns
[Role ID and Role Name] as shown below to confirm the import was
successful. If not, repeat the import process.
6.
Generate the device configuration, after a configuration has been properly
configured.
Result: If there are no errors or warnings, the red dot on the device should not appear
and the generated device is ready to be downloaded into the D20MX RTU.
7.
The transfer of a D20 configuration into a D20MX configuration is complete.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
163
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
Configuration file in project directory
NOTE
In step 5.4.5, a D20MXDEVICE.SHX file was created after generating the tables of this
D20MX device created. This file can be found within the device directory in windows
explorer.
The D20MXDEVICE.SHX file is the file downloaded into the D20MX during the configuration
download process.
164
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
Downloading a D20MX configuration
A D20MX configuration can be downloaded either through a:
•
Local [Serial] Transfer of Configuration, or a
•
Remote [Secure] Transfer of Configuration
Local [serial] transfer of configuration
The local transfer of configuration can be done by either:
Option 1 - use
ConfigPro terminal
emulator and the F7
key
•
“Option 1 - use ConfigPro terminal emulator and the F7 key” on page 165
•
“Option 2 - Use a non-ConfigPro terminal emulator and a “dl” command” on page 168
Serial configuration download to the D20MX is done from within ConfigPro similar to a
D20.
To use a serial connection to download a configuration to the D20MX, using the ConfigPro
terminal emulator and F7 key:
1.
Connect a cable; either a:
–
NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) from the RS-232
connector at the front panel of the D20MX to the serial communication port of the
PC.
–
WESMAINT cable [977-0300] could be used to connect the WESMAINT port at the
back of the D20MX chassis to the serial communication port of the PC.
OR
2.
Set up the terminal emulator with the D20MX communications parameters.
2.1.
From ConfigPro, select Device > Communications > Communications
Options….
Result: The Communications Options window appears.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
165
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
2.2.
Set the communication options:
– Baud Rate: baud rate of the D20MX (9600 or 19200 bps - see “RS-232”
on page 65 if you need to change the baud rate).
– Parity: None
– Data Bits: 8
– Stop Bits; 1
2.3.
Connect to the D20MX device.
2.3.1. Right-click or click the device icon.
2.3.2. Select Device > Communications > Terminal Emulator.
2.3.3. Login to the D20MX terminal using the login and password. When logging
into the D20MX for the first time, use the default login and password
[Login: admin | Password: changeme].
Result: The D20M prompt appears.
2.3.4. Confirm that access is allowed by pressing the Enter key a couple of
times.
2.4.
Download [sync] the configuration from ConfigPro to the D20MX by pressing
the F7 key on the key board.
2.5.
Optionally you can set up the terminal emulator for faster download speed:
2.5.1. Login to the D20MX device through the ConfigPro Terminal Emulator.
Result: The D20M prompt appears.
2.5.2. Type baud 57600 and press Enter.
Result: The D20MX baud rate changes to 57600.
2.5.3. Disconnect the D20MX from ConfigPro by selecting Communications >
Disconnect.
2.5.4. Open the communication properties by selecting Device >
Communications > Communications Options….
Result: The Communications Options window appears.
166
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
2.5.5. Change the baud rate to match 57600 by selecting the Software
Transmit and Software Receive options and then clicking OK.
2.5.6. Reconnect to and login to the D20MX. See step 2.3 [Connect to the
D20MX device].
2.5.7. Download [sync] the configuration from ConfigPro to the D20MX by
pressing the F7 key.
Result: The Download Configuration File progress bar appears.
2.6.
NOTE
Restart the D20MX device when the download is complete by clicking Boot.
Booting the D20MX resets it to its previous baud rate. If the baud rate in the
D20MX is not the same as that in the communication properties, the command
prompt shows the following characters.
If this is the case, change the ConfigPro communication properties to match
the baud rate of the D20MX.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
167
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
Option 2 - Use a nonConfigPro terminal
emulator and a “dl”
command
A D20MXDEVICE.SHX file is created when the tables of the D20MX device are generated.
See section “Configuration file in project directory” on page 164 or see step 8 [Locate the
D20MXDEVICE.SHX file] within this section.
Serially transfer the D20MXDEVICE.SHX file using Tera term (a terminal emulator) to the
D20MX RTU using the dl command; this is similar to the download process of a D20ME
firmware configuration. This download process is done at the D20M prompt.
To download a configuration to the D20MX, using a non-ConfigPro terminal emulator and
a “dl” command:
1.
Connect a NULL modem cable (GE Grid Solutions part number 977-0529) from the RS232 connector located at the front panel of the D20MX to the serial communications
port of the PC or terminal.
2.
Set-up a VT100 terminal emulator [e.g., Tera term Pro] with the following serial
communication parameter values:
Value
Port
COM1 or COM2, or as required by the computer being used.
Baud Rate
Baud rate of the D20MX (9600 or 19200 bps - see “RS-232” on page 65
if you need to change the baud rate).
Data
8 bit
Parity
none
Stop
1 bit
Flow Control
Xon/Xoff
Transmit delay
0 msec/char; 0 msec/line
To determine the computer port used, on the computer's desk top, right-click on the
My Computer short-cut icon and go to Manage. Go to Device Manager > Ports as
shown below.
NOTE
3.
168
Parameter
Login to the D20MX device. The factory default configuration for the D20MX comes
with one default user account with: Username: admin; Password: changeme.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
4.
Navigate to the D20M prompt; this is called a SHELL prompt - an equivalent of the 68K
monitor prompt.
5.
Press the Enter key a couple of time to display and confirm the required prompt; that
is, D20M.
6.
Type sp to suspend the processor, then type dl to download and press Enter.
7.
The D20MXDEVICE.SHX file located in the project directory below can simply be
dragged and dropped in the Tera term window.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
169
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
8.
9.
NOTE
170
Locate the D20MXDEVICE.SHX file.
8.1.
Open Windows explorer.
8.2.
Navigate to the project directory where this D20MX device is located.
Note: The file name D20MXDEVICE represents the device name.
Drag and drop the D20MXDEVICE.SHX file onto the Tera term window.
Once a configuration download has been completed, it is recommended that the default
user account information be changed as soon as possible. Refer to the B014-1NCG
WESMAINT II+ for the D20MX - Configuration Guide for details on how to modify user
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
accounts and how to change the password of a user. The D20MX configuration can be
defaulted by pressing CTRL-F on a terminal connected over the front RS232 port during
startup. In addition, if the D20MX detects a corrupt configuration on startup, it generates a
system default configuration.
The system default configuration comes with one user account: username: recover;
password: system. Login with this username and synchronize a configuration to the
D20MX over the front RS232 port.
NOTE
The D20MX can only be accessed over the front RS232 port with the system default
configuration.
If you synchronize a configuration with any of the following errors: “there are no
usernames configured in the B014 User table”; “the B014 User table is disabled”, or “the
B014 application definition does not match the firmware version”, then the applications do
not start and you have only serial access in debug mode.
Remote [secure] transfer of configuration
Since Telnet and TFTP file transfer do not provide a secure means to connect or transfer
data to the D20MX RTU, they are not supported within the D20MX.
The D20MX now supports both SSH and SFTP means of connection. The D20MX RTU must
be equipped with a valid IP configuration that allows computer PC connectivity.
WinSCP is an example of a commonly used tool that allows connectivity to the D20MX
remotely. This can be found on the web. WinSCP downloads are available at:
http://winscp.net/eng/download.php
To transfer the configuration file:
1.
Set your computer IP address to be in the same domain [IP address and Subnet mask]
as the D20MX.
2.
Close any currently opened terminal session to the D20MX.
3.
Start WinSCP.
Result: The WinSCP Login window appears.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
171
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
4.
Login to WinSCP using the D20MX IP address and port number 922 or the configured
CommandSSH port.
In the D20MX configuration, port 922 has been created in the Services section of the
Device LAN Properties as CommandSSH.
NOTE
172
5.
If the following window appears, click Yes.
6.
Make a copy of the generated configuration file D20MXDEVICE.SHX and rename it to
device.shx.
7.
Transfer the device.shx file by dragging it from your computer local drive into the
D20MX's ram.
Result: The Copy window appears.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
8.
Click Copy.
9.
Login to the D20M prompt of the D20MX RTU - this is the SHELL [option 3] menu.
10. Suspend the processor by typing sp and pressing Enter.
11. Copy the configuration by typing cc and pressing Enter.
12. Select the configuration file by tying sc and pressing Enter.
13. Restart the D20MX device by typing boot and pressing Enter.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
173
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
Application definition files and default
configurations
The D20MX Documentation CD or extracted zip file contains numerous folders and files.
The three main folders for the purpose of this document are highlighted below.
The D20MX Documentation CD or extracted zip file contains all of the following:
•
Configuration guides, including the WESMAINT II+ user and configuration guides.
•
Factory Default Configuration files: Application Definitions/D20MXv1_3Appldefs. The
ConfigPro sub-folder contains the factory default zipped ConfigPro files.
Staging factory default configuration files
To stage the factory default configuration files so that they may be accessed by ConfigPro:
1.
Press the Windows Key
and E at the same time.
Result: The Windows Explorer window appears.
2.
Navigate to a folder to which you have write permissions.
3.
Click the New folder button in Windows Explorer
Result: The content of the folder appears.
Result: A new folder is created with the name “New folder” and the cursor is positioned
to allow renaming of the folder.
4.
Rename the folder to D20MXVXX.
Result: The folder is renamed to D20MXVXX.
5.
Access the D20MX Documentation CD files by either:
5.1.
Insert the D20MX Documentation CD in to the computer’s DVD/CD drive, or
5.2.
Extract the D20MX Documentation CD zip file on to the root of your C: drive and
double click the readme.html file under the ISO-Image sub-folder, which is
nested two levels deep into the extracted folder.
Result: The Documentation CD home page appears in your default Web Browser.
Result: Alternately for step 5.1, the home page does not appear in your default Web
Browser. In this case, navigate to the CD in Windows Explorer, and double-click the
readme.html file on the root of the CD.
174
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
6.
Under the D20MX Factory Default Configuration Files section, click on the link
named ConfigPro.
7.
Using Windows Explorer, copy/paste the files as shown in the following table. To copy
a file, select it and press Ctrl-C. To paste a file, click on the Windows Explorer window
showing the new D20MXVXX folder and press Ctrl-V.
Result: The Factory Default Configuration Files folder appears.
Navigate to folder on D20MX Documentation CD
or Folder extracted from Zip File
Copy/Paste the following files to the
new folder D20MXVXX
MX01-XX.zip
MX01-XX.zip
MX02-XX.zip
MX02-XX.zip
Result: The files shown in the above table appear in the new D20MXvXX folder of the
Windows Explorer window.
Installing application definitions: archived
To install the application definitions:
1.
From ConfigPro, initiate the Application Installer by selecting Tools > Application
Installer.
Result: The ConfigPro Application Installer - Welcome window appears.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
175
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
2.
Select the Install all applications from archive option and click Next.
Result: The ConfigPro Application Installer - Select Archive window appears.
3.
Select the source directory where the application archive is stored.
4.
176
3.1.
Navigate to the source directory: Go to the D20MX Documentation CD or
extracted zip file folder > Configuration Files sub-folder > Application
Definitions folder.
3.2.
Select the D20MXv1.5Appldefs.zip file.
3.3.
Click Select.
Click Next.
Result: The ConfigPro Application Installer - Select Destination Directory window
appears.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
5.
Select the destination directory into which the application definitions are to be copied.
To determine the destination directory, in ConfigPro, go to File > Preferences >
Directories. This is the path highlighted in the screen capture below
[C:\WESSYS\ApplDef]
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
177
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
6.
Click Next.
Result: The ConfigPro Application Installer - Installation Complete window appears.
7.
Click Finish.
Installing application definitions: non-archived
In the D20MX Documentation CD or extracted zip file, the DEFNs folder contains the
APPLDEF sub-folder with all the application definition files.
To install missing application definition files:
1.
178
From ConfigPro select Tools > Application Installer.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
Result: The ConfigPro Application Installer wizard appears.
2.
Choose either of the following options:
–
Install all the applications required in a project
–
Install a number of applications YOU select.
3.
Click Next.
Result: The ConfigPro Application Installer - Select Source Directory window appears.
4.
Select a Source director [this is the DEFNs/ APPLDEF path within the D20MX
Documentation CD or extracted zip file].
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
179
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
180
5.
Select the DAL100.DB file and click Select. The Definitions Found field should indicate
Yes.
6.
Click Next.
Result: The ConfigPro Application Installer - Select a ConfigPro Project window
appears.
7.
Select the ConfigPro project that requires these application definitions.
8.
Click Next.
Result: The ConfigPro Application Installer - Select Destination Directory window
appears.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
9.
Select the destination directory into which the application definitions are to be copied.
To determine the destination directory, in ConfigPro, go to File > Preferences >
Directories. This is the path highlighted in the screen capture below
[C:\WESSYS\ApplDef]
10. Click Next.
Result: The ConfigPro Application Installer - Installation Complete window appears.
11. Click Finish.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
181
APPENDIX D: USING CONFIGPRO WITH D20MX
182
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Appendix E: Secure Connection for
LogicLinx
Secure Connection for LogicLinx
This appendix provides the procedure to set up a secure connection to the D20MX for use
with the LogicLinx editor in either ConfigPro or SGConfig.
It is recommended that you use this procedure since it allows for strong security using the
authentication, authorization and accounting model supported by other access points of
the D20MX.
Secure connection with SGConfig v8.1 or higher
To set up a secure connection to the D20MX for use with the LogicLinx editor using
SGConfig v8.1 or higher:
1.
Configure B014-1N WESMAINT II+ to grant the necessary privileges to allow the user
to make connections to the LogicLinx application on the D20MX.
See “WESMAINT user configuration” on page 184.
2.
Configure B082-0N LogicLinx to require a secure connection.
3.
Establish the secure tunnel using the LogicLinx Editor > LogicLinx Editor (Debug)
command in SGConfig. Refer to the SGConfig online help for details on the LogicLinx
Editor.
See “LogicLinx (B082-0N) configuration” on page 186.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
183
APPENDIX E: SECURE CONNECTION FOR LOGICLINX
Secure connection with ConfigPro
When using ConfigPro, the Windows* application 'PuTTY' (also known as “putty”) is used to
establish an SSH tunnel from the LogicLinx editor running on the Windows PC to the
LogicLinx application (B082) running on the D20MX. The establishment of an SSH Tunnel is
also known as 'port forwarding'. At the time this procedure was published, the PuTTY
Windows installer could be downloaded from:
http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html
To set up a secure connection to the D20MX for use with the LogicLinx editor using
ConfigPro:
1.
Configure B014-1N WESMAINT II+ to grant the necessary privileges to allow the user
to make connections to the LogicLinx application on the D20MX.
Refer to section “WESMAINT user configuration” on page 184.
2.
Configure B082-0N LogicLinx to require a secure connection.
3.
Establish the secure tunnel using PuTTY.
4.
Configure the LogicLinx editor to use the secure tunnel.
Refer to section: “LogicLinx (B082-0N) configuration” on page 186.
Refer to section “PuTTY configuration” on page 187.
Refer to section “LogicLinx Editor configuration” on page 191.
WESMAINT user configuration
In this procedure, a new local user “tom” is created and granted privileges to make
connections to the LogicLinx application on the D20MX. If you are using remote
authentication with RADIUS, the required privileges are available in the default settings of
the Administrator or Engineer role.
To grant the necessary privileges to allow a local user to make connections to the
LogicLinx application on the D20MX:
1.
View the Engineer role information from the RADIUS role table.
In the WESMAINT II+ application:
1.1.
Open the RADIUS Role table.
1.2.
Select the row containing the role name “Engineer”.
1.3.
Scroll right until you see the “Application Control” column.
1.4.
Double click the Application Control field for the Engineer role.
Result: A dialog showing the access flags for the Engineer role appears.
184
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX E: SECURE CONNECTION FOR LOGICLINX
2.
Copy the access flags from the Engineer role:
2.1.
Select all of the rows up to the first row with a 0 in the Application Control field.
2.2.
Press Ctrl-C to copy the rows.
Result: The access flags for the Engineer role as shown in the following screen are
stored in the Windows clipboard.
3.
View the access flags for a new local user:
3.1.
Open the User Configuration table.
3.2.
Add a new row and scroll left until you see the Application Control column.
3.3.
Double-click the Application Control field.
Result: A dialog showing the access flags for the new user appears.
4.
Select the first row and press Ctrl-V to paste the application control flags from the
Engineer role to the new local user.
Result: A dialog showing the Paste Options appears.
5.
Click OK.
Result: The access flags for the Engineer role now appear in the new user's access flag
list.
6.
Click OK.
7.
For the Monitor Access Level field, select Maintenance.
8.
For the User Name field, type the name of the user, for example: tom.
9.
Click OK and OK.
Result: The User Configuration table reappears.
Result: The WESMAINT User Configuration is closed.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
185
APPENDIX E: SECURE CONNECTION FOR LOGICLINX
LogicLinx (B082-0N) configuration
To configure B082-0N LogicLinx to require a secure connection:
1.
In the Logic Linx (B082-0N V400) Communication Types configuration table set:
a) Communications Type:
b) SSH Tunnel:
Ethernet
Tunnel Enabled
c) Port Number: 1100
The Port Number may be any unused port number on the D20MX between 1 and
65535.
NOTE
Result: The LogicLinx configuration appears as shown in the following screen.
2.
186
Generate and synchronize this configuration to the target D20MX.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX E: SECURE CONNECTION FOR LOGICLINX
PuTTY configuration
To establish a secure tunnel using PuTTY:
1.
Start PuTTY.
2.
In the PuTTY Configuration dialog box, select Connection > SSH > Tunnels.
2.1.
Under Port forwarding leave Local ports … and Remote ports… unchecked.
2.2.
Under Add new forwarding port: in the Source Port box type 1100, or any free
TCP port number on your PC.
2.3.
In the Destination box, type the IP address 127.0.0.1:1100, where 1100 is the
port number set in the LogicLinx configuration (refer to step 1 in the: “LogicLinx
(B082-0N) configuration” section).
2.4.
Click the IPv4 radio button.
Result: The PuTTY Configuration dialog box appears as in the following screen:
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
187
APPENDIX E: SECURE CONNECTION FOR LOGICLINX
2.5.
3.
In the PuTTY Configuration dialog box, select Connection.
3.1.
4.
In the Seconds between keepalives ... box, type 10.
Result: The PuTTY Configuration dialog box appears as in the following screen:
In the PuTTY Configuration dialog box, select Session.
4.1.
188
Click the Add button.
Result: The PuTTY Configuration dialog box appears as in the following screen:
In the Host Name box type the address of the target D20MX, for example:
192.168.230.100.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX E: SECURE CONNECTION FOR LOGICLINX
4.2.
In the Port box type the configured commandSSH port number on the D20MX
(for example, 922).
4.3.
Under Connection Type, select SSH.
4.4.
Type a name in the Saved Sessions box (for example, PortFrw) and click Save.
You may use the saved session the next time a secure connection is needed
and avoid having to re-enter the PuTTY configuration settings.
Result: The PuTTY Configuration dialog box appears as in the following screen:
4.5.
Click the Open button.
Result: A Terminal window appears.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
189
APPENDIX E: SECURE CONNECTION FOR LOGICLINX
5.
Login as tom.
Result: The Login Banner appears and the D20M> prompt appears as shown in the
following screen:
NOTE
Leave the PuTTY window open throughout a debugger session or back-to-back
debugger sessions. Once you are all finished running the debugger, close the PuTTY
window to close down the SSH tunnel.
When Tom logs in, a connection event is added to the User Log:. For example:
NOTE
190
6 13/12/18 11:15:46 <Net OK > tom (SSH) originip="192.168.230.120" originMac="D8:9D:B9:00:0B:9C"
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX E: SECURE CONNECTION FOR LOGICLINX
LogicLinx Editor configuration
To configure the LogicLinx editor to use the secure connection:
1.
Start ConfigPro or SGConfig using “Run As Administrator”.
2.
Open the Project containing the target D20MX device.
3.
If using ConfigPro, open the target D20MX device.
4.
Start the LogicLinx editor:
5.
4.1.
If using ConfigPro, right click on the LogicLinx icon under the Data Translation
Applications tab and select Tools > LogicLinx Editor.
4.2.
If using SGConfig, click LogicLinx under the Automation Applications node of
the Applications List, and then click the LogicLinx Editor icon.
Result: The LogicLinx - Project Management window appears.
Double click the program icon or its name (e.g. main).
Result: The LogicLinx Programs window appears.
6.
Click the Link Setup
icon.
Result: The PC-PLC link parameters dialog appears.
7.
Set the Communication port box to ETHERNET.
Result: The PC-PLC link parameters dialog appears as in the following screen:
8.
9.
Change the Ethernet link parameters:
8.1.
Click the Setup button.
8.2.
Type 127.0.0.1 into the Internet address box.
8.3.
Type the port number you entered in step 2.2.of section “PuTTY configuration”
into the Port number box (for example: 1100).
Result: The ETHERNET link parameters dialog appears as shown in the following
screen:
8.4.
Click OK.
Connect the debugger by clicking the Debug
icon.
Result: The LogicLinx Debugger window appears and is connected to the target
D20MX.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
191
APPENDIX E: SECURE CONNECTION FOR LOGICLINX
When Tom connects to the target D20MX, a port forward event is added to the User
Log:. For example:
NOTE
7 13/12/18 11:15:50 <SPF OK > tom (SSH) - Destination Port
FW:127.0.0.1:1100
192
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Appendix F: D20 Spare CrossReference
D20 Spare Cross-Reference
Visit the online store for the appropriate spare parts and the rules governing subcomponent selections:
• D20MX Processor spare parts
• D20K Control Output Module spare parts
• D20S Status Input Module spare parts
• D20A Analog Input Module spare parts
• D20C Combination I/O Module spare parts
• D20KI Interposer Relay Panel spare parts
This appendix provides spare cross-reference tables for the following modules:
• “D20 spare parts modules, spare cross-reference” on page 194
• “D20A analog input modules, spare cross-reference” on page 196
• “D20C combination modules, spare cross-reference” on page 198
• “D20K control modules, spare cross-reference” on page 201
• “D20S status modules, spare cross-reference” on page 202
Smart catalog numbers
This appendix cross references the old part numbers with the new smart catalogue
numbers. In general, the smart catalogue numbers represented here only indicate the
prefix or base-line for the complete smart order code. For the complete smart order code,
you need to specify the selections for the various sub-components.
The Smart Catalog Number provided in the following sub-sections only contain the prefix;
to see the complete order code, use the online product configurator available on the GE
Grid Solutions Online Store to select the desired options.
In the following tables > Smart Part Number Prefix column:
X-X represents product options to be configured to complete the order code
U-U represents “Not Needed”
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
193
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
D20 spare parts modules, spare cross-reference
Spare part numbers are listed for:
•
“Processors” on page 194
•
“Modems” on page 194
•
“Termination” on page 194
•
“Power supply” on page 195
•
“Chassis” on page 195
Processors
For information o the processors, refer to:
•
Section “D20MX upgrade kits” on page 35
•
Table 10 on page 34
To access the online product configurator The GE Grid SolutionsOnline store at:
http://store.gedigitalenergy.com/ViewProduct.aspx?Model=D20MX%20Kit
To choose only the D20MX processor, select D20MX Kit Type: (C)- D20MX CPU ONLY.
Modems
Use the online product configurator available on the GE Grid Solutions Online Store to see
the modem part numbers at:
http://store.gedigitalenergy.com/ViewProduct.aspx?Model=D20%20ME%20Parts
Description
Part Number Smart Catalog Number Prefix
WESDAC D20 202/V.23 Modem, bin mount
520-0120
WESDAC D20 202/V.23 Modem, bin mount,
conformal coated
520-0120-CC D20ME-M-B-U-U
Modem, Telenetics 14.4K 2 wire Dialup, Bin mount
580-0771
D20ME-M-C-U-U
Modem, Telenetics 14.4K 4 wire Leased line, bin
mount
580-0772
D20ME-M-D-U-U
WESDAC 202/V.23 Modem, 19 inch rack mount
520-0090
D20ME-M-E-U-U
WESDAC 202/V.23 Modem, 19 inch rack mount,
conformal coated
520-0090-CC D20ME-M-F-U-U
D20ME-M-A-U-U
The 520-0120, 520-0120-CC, 520-0090 and 520-0090-CC modems are currently not
supported by the D20MX
NOTE
Termination
Use the online product configurator available on the GE Grid Solutions Online Store to see
the termination part numbers at:
http://store.gedigitalenergy.com/ViewProduct.aspx?Model=D20%20ME%20Parts
Description
Part Number Smart Catalog Number Prefix
WESTERM D20 termination Panel, Panel Mount, 15 517-0225
inch ribbon I/F cable
D20ME-T-A-U-U
WESTERM D20 termination Panel, Panel Mount, 15 517-0225-CC D20ME-T-D-U-U
inch ribbon I/F cable, conformal coated
194
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
Description
Part Number Smart Catalog Number Prefix
WESTERM D20 termination Panel, Chassis Mount
517-0230
D20ME-T-B-U-U
WESTERM D20 termination Panel, Panel Mount, 24 517-0300
inch ribbon I/F cable
D20ME-T-C-U-U
Power supply
Use the online product configurator available on the GE Grid Solutions Online Store to see
the power supply part numbers at:
http://store.gedigitalenergy.com/ViewProduct.aspx?Model=D20%20ME%20Parts
Description
Part Number Smart Catalog Number Prefix
D20 Power Supply, 20-60VDC Input, 24V ISO Output 580-2004
D20ME-S-A-U-U
D20 Power Supply, 20-60VDC Input, 48V ISO Output 580-2005
D20ME-S-B-U-U
D20 Power Supply, 100-300VDC/85-264VAC Input, 580-2006
24V ISO Output
D20ME-S-C-U-U
D20 Power Supply, 100-300VDC/85-264VAC Input, 580-2007
48V ISO Output
D20ME-S-D-U-U
Chassis
Use the online product configurator available on the GE Grid Solutions Online Store to see
the modem part numbers at:
http://store.gedigitalenergy.com/ViewProduct.aspx?Model=D20%20ME%20Parts
Description
Part Number
Smart Catalog
Number Prefix
D20 Chassis assembly non-VME 3U, single slot
500-0305
D20ME-C-A-U-U
D20 Chassis assembly VME 3U
500-0280 & Cover Plates
D20ME-C-B-U-U
D20 Chassis assembly non-VME 3U, single slot,
Conformal Coated
500-0305-CC
D20ME-C-C-U-U
D20 Chassis assembly VME 3U, Conformal Coated 500-0280-CC & Cover
Plates
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
D20ME-C-D-U-U
195
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
D20A analog input modules, spare cross-reference
Use the online product configurator available on the GE Grid Solutions Online Store to see
the D20A module part numbers at:
http://store.gedigitalenergy.com/ViewProduct.aspx?Model=D20A%20Spare%20Parts
Legacy and new part numbers are listed for:
•
“D20A WESTERM modules” on page 196
•
“D20A WESDAC modules” on page 196
•
“DNP3A WESDAC modules” on page 197
•
“D20A adapter modules” on page 197
D20A WESTERM modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart Description
Catalog Number Prefix
517-0163
WESTERM D20A Type 1 Version 1 D20A-TL-P-U
D20A 32 inputs, LV Power input (20-60VDC or D.20),
compression termination
517-0163-CC
WESTERM D20A Type 1 Version 1 D20A-TL-P-C
Conformal Coated
D20A 32 inputs, LV Power input (20-60VDC or D.20),
compression termination, conformal coated
517-0240
WESTERM D20 AZ
D20A-TH-P-U
D20AZ 32 inputs, HV Power input (40-150VDC),
compression termination
517-0240-CC
WESTERM D20 AZ Conformal
Coated
D20A-TH-P-C
D20AZ 32 inputs, HV Power input (40-150VDC),
compression termination, conformal coated
517-0240-ECC WESTERM D20 AZ - Epoxy
Conformal Coated
D20A-TH-P-E
D20AZ 32 inputs, HV Power input (40-150VDC),
compression termination, epoxy conformal coated
517-0328
WESTERM D20AB
D20A-TL-B-U
D20AB 32 inputs, LV Power input (20-60VDC or D.20),
barrier termination
517-0328-CC
WESTERM D20AB Conformal
Coated
D20A-TL-B-C
D20AB 32 inputs, LV Power input (20-60VDC or D.20),
barrier termination, conformal coated
517-0178
WESTERM D20 AD
D20A-TL-D-U
D20AD 32 inputs, LV Power input (20-60VDC or D.20),
DB25 termination
517-0178-CC
WESTERM D20 AD Conformal
Coated
D20A-TL-D-C
D20AD 32 inputs, LV Power input (20-60VDC or D.20),
DB25 termination, conformal coated
517-0251
WESTERM D20 OAD
D20A-TM-D-U
D20OAD 32 inputs, LV Power Input (40-150VDC), DB25
termination, redundant D.20 link and PS input
517-0216
WESTERM D20AX W/TB Plugs
D20A-TL-X-U
D20AX 32 inputs, LV Power input (20-60VDC or D.20),
compression disconnect termination
517-0216-CC
WESTERM D20AX W/TB Plugs
Conformal Coated
D20A-TL-X-C
D20AX 32 inputs, LV Power input (20-60VDC or D.20),
compression disconnect termination, conformal
coated
517-0364
WESTERM D20AZ Break Away W/ D20A-TH-X-U
TBS
D20AZ 32 inputs, HV Power input (40-150VDC),
compression disconnect termination
D20A WESDAC modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
511-0101
WESDAC D20A Type 1 Version 1
D20A-DL-U-U
WESDAC D20A LV
511-0101-CC
WESDAC D20A Type 1 Version 1
Conformal Coated
D20A-DL-U-C
WESDAC D20A LV Conformal Coated
511-0103
WESDAC D20A HV2
D20A-DH-U-U
WESDAC D20A HV
196
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
511-0103-CC
WESDAC D20A HV2 Conformal
Coated
D20A-DH-U-C
WESDAC D20A HV Conformal Coated
D20A-DH-U-E
WESDAC D20A HV Epoxy Conformal Coated
511-0103-ECC WESTERM D20SX W/TB Plugs
DNP3A WESDAC modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
511-0301
DNP I/O Module - DC Analog Input
D20A-3L-U-U
WESDAC D20A LV, DNP3 Communications
511-0301
DNP I/O Module - DC Analog Input
Conformal Coated
D20A-3L-U-C
WESDAC D20A LV, DNP3 Communications,
Conformal Coated
511-0303
DNP I/O Module - DC Analog Input HV
D20A-3H-U-U
WESDAC D20A HV, DNP3 Communications
D20A adapter modules
Legacy Part Description
Number
New Part Number - Smart Description
Catalog Number Prefix
530-0004
Analog Adaptor, I/P Voltage
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-1-U-U
Voltage Input adaptor - /+ 1, +/- 5, +/- 10 VDC (Set of 32:
530-0004)
530-0005
Analog Adaptor, I/P 1MA/1V
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-2-U-U
1 mA / 1V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0005)
530-0045
Analog Adaptor, I/P 2MA/1V
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-3-U-U
10 mA / 5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0045)
530-0050
1MA/5V I/P Analog Adaptor
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-4-U-U
1 mA / 5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0050)
530-0025
1.2MA/1V I/P Analog Adaptor
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-5-U-U
1.2 mA / 1V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0025)
530-0051
Analog Adaptor, I/P (2MA/5V)
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-6-U-U
2 mA / 5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0051)
530-0052
Analog Adaptor, I/P 20MA/5V
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-7-U-U
20 mA / 5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0052)
530-0090
Analog Adaptor, I/P 1MA/5V
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-9-U-U
1 mA / 5V current input adaptor, high precision (Set of 32:
530-0090)
530-0095
Analog Adaptor, I/P 1.5MA/5V
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-A-U-U
1.5 mA / 5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0095)
530-0108
Analog Adaptor, 2MA/5V I/P
0.01%
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-B-U-U
2 mA / 5V current input adaptor, high precision 0.01% (Set
of 32: 530-0108)
530-0003
Analog Adaptor, I/P 20MA/1V
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-C-U-U
20mA/1V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0003)
530-0030
1.5MA/1V I/P Analog Adaptor
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-D-U-U
1.5 mA / 1V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0030)
530-0073
5MA/1V I/P Analog Adaptor
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-G-U-U
5mA/1V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0073)
530-0085
2.5MA/5V I/P Analog Adaptor
)D20A-U-U-U-U-U-J-U-U
2.5mA/5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0085)
530-0091
1.1MA/5V I/P Analog Adaptor
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-N-U-U
1.1mA/5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0091)
530-0094
Analog Adaptor, I/P 1.25MA/5V
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-P-U-U
1.25mA/5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0094)
530-0131
Analog Adaptor 12.8MA/5V
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-Q-U-U
12.8mA/5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0131)
530-0086
50MA/5V I/P Analog Adaptor
D20A-U-U-U-U-U-H-U-U
50mA/5V current input adaptor (Set of 32: 530-0086)
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
197
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
D20C combination modules, spare cross-reference
Use the online product configurator available on the GE Grid Solutions Online Store to see
the D20C module part numbers at:
http://store.gedigitalenergy.com/ViewProduct.aspx?Model=D20C%20Parts
Legacy and new part numbers are listed for:
•
“D20C WESTERM Modules” on page 198
•
“D20C WESDAC modules” on page 198
•
“DNP3C WESDAC modules” on page 199
•
“D20C digital input adapter modules” on page 199
•
“D20C first slot of analog adapter modules” on page 199
•
“D20C second slot of analog adapter modules” on page 200
•
“D20C output adapters” on page 200
•
“D20C WESDAC daughter cards” on page 200
D20C WESTERM Modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
517-0169
WESTERM D20C Type 1 Version 1 D20CS-T-1
D20C LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), Compression
Termination & DB25 for Interposer relays
517-0180
WESTERM D20 CD
D20CS-T-2
D20CD LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), DB25
Termination
517-0326
WESTERM D20 CB
D20CS-T-3
D20CB LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), Barrier
Termination & DB25 for Interposer relays
517-0217
WESTERM D20 CX W/TB Plugs
D20CS-T-4
D20CX LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), Compression
Disconnect Termination & DB25 for Interposer relays
517-0333
WESTERM D20 CDI, 48V
D20CS-T-6
D20CDI LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), 48V Isolated
Common & DB25 for Interposer relays
517-0263
WESTERM D20 CDI, 130V
D20CS-T-7
D20CDI LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), 130V Isolated
Common & DB25 for Interposer relays (
517-0239
WESTERM D20 C4Z, 48V DI
D20CS-T-8
D20C4Z HV 48V DI Compression Termination Analog
Input Only
517-0325
WESTERM D20 C4Z2, 48V DI
D20CS-T-5
D20C4Z HV 48V DI Compression Disconnect
Termination
517-0253
WESTERM D20 C4Z 110V DI
D20CS-T-9
D20C4Z HV 110V DI Compression Termination Analog
Input Only
517-0362
WESTERM D20 C4Z2 24V DI
D20CS-T-A
D20C4Z2 HV 24V DI Compression Termination Analog
Input & Output Allowed
517-0363
WESTERM D20 C4Z2 with Plugs,
48V DI
D20CS-T-C
D20C4Z2 HV 48V DI Compression Disconnect
Termination
517-0267
WESTERM D20 C4Z2 (220V)
D20CS-T-D
D20C4Z2 HV 220V DI Compression Disconnect
Termination
D20C WESDAC modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
504-0002
WESDAC D20C+
D20CS-D-1
WESDAC D20C LV
504-0003
WESDAC D20C HV
D20CS-D-2
WESDAC D20C HV
198
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
DNP3C WESDAC modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
504-0302
DNP I/O LV Module - Combination
D20CS-3-1
WESDAC D20C LV, DNP3 Communications
504-0303
DNP I/O HV Module - Combination
D20CS-3-2
WESDAC D20C HV, DNP3 Communications
D20C digital input adapter modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
245-0031
D20 C 12V Digital Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-1-U-U-U-U-U-U-U 12V Digital Input Adapter [245-0031]
245-0030 (4x),
245-0029 (2x)
D20 C 24V Digital Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-2-U-U-U-U-U-U-U 24V Digital Input Adapter [245-0030 (4x), 2450029 (2x)]
245-0004
D20 C 48V Digital Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-3-U-U-U-U-U-U-U 48V Digital Input Adapter [245-0004]
530-0133
D20 C 130V Digital Input Adapter D20CS-U-U-U-4-U-U-U-U-U-U-U 130V Digital Input Adapter for LV [530-0133]
for LV
245-0012
D20 C 220V Digital Input Adapter D20CS-U-U-U-5-U-U-U-U-U-U-U 130V Digital Input Adapter for HV [245-0012]
for HV
D20C first slot of analog adapter modules
Legacy Part Description
Number
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
530-0004
D20C Voltage Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-1-U-U-U-U-U-U Voltage Input Adapter [530-0004]
530-0087
0.1mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-2-U-U-U-U-U-U 0.1mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0087]
530-0088
0.3mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-3-U-U-U-U-U-U 0.3mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0088]
530-0089
0.5mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-4-U-U-U-U-U-U 0.5mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0089]
530-0050
1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-5-U-U-U-U-U-U 1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0050]
530-0090
1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
[High Precision]
D20CS-U-U-U-U-6-U-U-U-U-U-U 1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [High
Precision] [530-0090]
530-0091
1.1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-7-U-U-U-U-U-U 1.1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0091]
530-0094
1.25 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter D20CS-U-U-U-U-8-U-U-U-U-U-U 1.25 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0094]
530-0095
1.5 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-9-U-U-U-U-U-U 1.5 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0095]
530-0051
2 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-A-U-U-U-U-U-U 2 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0051]
530-0108
2 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
[High Precision]
D20CS-U-U-U-U-B-U-U-U-U-U-U 2 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [High
Precision] [530-0108]
530-0086
2.5 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-C-U-U-U-U-U-U 2.5 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0085]
530-0045
2mA to 1V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-D-U-U-U-U-U-U 2mA to 1V Current Input Adapter [530-0045]
530-0131
12.8 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter D20CS-U-U-U-U-E-U-U-U-U-U-U 12.8 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0131]
530-0052
20 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-F-U-U-U-U-U-U 20 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0052]
530-0086
50 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-G-U-U-U-U-U-U 50 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0086]
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Description
GE INFORMATION
199
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
D20C second slot of analog adapter modules
Legacy Part Description
Number
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
530-0004
D20C Voltage Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-1-U-U-U-U-U Voltage Input Adapter [530-0004
530-0087
0.1mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-2-U-U-U-U-U 0.1mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0087]
530-0088
0.3mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-3-U-U-U-U-U 0.3mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0088]
530-0089
0.5mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-4-U-U-U-U-U 0.5mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0089]
530-0050
1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-5-U-U-U-U-U 1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0050]
530-0090
1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
[High Precision]
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-6-U-U-U-U-U 1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [High
Precision] [530-0090]
530-0091
1.1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-7-U-U-U-U-U 1.1 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0091]
530-0094
1.25 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-8-U-U-U-U-U 1.25 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0094]
530-0095
1.5 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-9-U-U-U-U-U 1.5 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0095]
530-0051
2 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-A-U-U-U-U-U 2 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0051]
530-0108
2 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
[High Precision]
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-B-U-U-U-U-U 2 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [High
Precision] [530-0108]
530-0086
2.5 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-C-U-U-U-U-U .5 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0086]
530-0045
2mA to 1V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-D-U-U-U-U-U 2mA to 1V Current Input Adapter [530-0045]
530-0131
12.8 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-E-U-U-U-U-U 12.8 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0131]
530-0052
20 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-F-U-U-U-U-U 20 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0052]
530-0086
50 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-G-U-U-U-U-U 50 mA to 5V Current Input Adapter [530-0086]
D20C output adapters
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
530-0083
Voltage Output Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-H-U-U-U-U-U Voltage Output Adapter [530-0083]
530-0079
1mA Current Output Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-I-U-U-U-U-U 1mA Current Output Adapter [530-0079]
530-0080
5mA Current Output Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-J-U-U-U-U-U 5mA Current Output Adapter [530-0080]
530-0081
10mA Current Output Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-K-U-U-U-U-U 10mA Current Output Adapter [530-0081]
530-0082
20mA Current Output Adapter
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-L-U-U-U-U-U 20mA Current Output Adapter [530-0082]
D20C WESDAC daughter cards
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
540-0162
WESDAC D20C D.20 Wesmaint
Interface (LV)
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-A WESDAC D20C LV Wesmaint Interface Module
[540-0162]
540-0209
WESDAC D20C D.20 Wesmaint
Interface (HV)
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-B WESDAC D20C HV Wesmaint Interface Module
[540-0209
540-0166
WESDAC D20C Analog I/O
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-C WESDAC D20C LV 8 Analog Input / 8 Analog
Output Expansion Module [540-0166]
540-0159
WESDAC D20C Analog I/P (LV)
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-D WESDAC D20C LV 16 Analog Input Expansion
Module [540-0159]
540-0205
WESDAC D20C Analog I/P (HV)
D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-E WESDAC D20C HV 16 Analog Input Expansion
Module [540-0205]
540-0227
WESDAC D20 CHV Analog I/O DB D20CS-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-U-F WESDAC D20C HV 8 Analog Input / 8 Analog
Output Expansion Module [540-0227]
200
GE INFORMATION
Description
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
D20K control modules, spare cross-reference
Use the online product configurator available on the GE Grid Solutions Online Store to see
the D20K module part numbers at:
http://store.gedigitalenergy.com/ViewProduct.aspx?Model=D20K%20Spare%20Parts
Legacy and new part numbers are listed for:
•
“D20K WESTERM modules” on page 201
•
“D20K WESDAC modules” on page 201
•
“DNP3K WESDAC modules” on page 202
D20K WESTERM modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
517-0164
WESTERM D20K Type 1 Version 1 D20K-TL-P-UU
D20K LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), Compression
Termination
517-0164-CC
WESTERM D20K Type 1 Version 1 D20K-TL-P-CU
(Conformal Coated)
D20K LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), Compression
Termination, Conformal Coated
517-0143
WESTERM D20 KR
D20K-TL-D-UU
D20KR LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), DB25
Termination
517-0143-CC
WESTERM D20 KR (Conformal
Coated)
D20K-TL-D-CU
D20KR LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), DB25
Termination, Conformal Coated
517-0218
WESTERM D20KX W/TB Plugs
D20K-TL-X-UU
D20KX LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), Compression
Disconnect Termination
517-0218-CC
WESTERM D20KX W/TB Plugs
(Conformal Coated)
D20K-TL-X-CU
D20KX LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), Compression
Disconnect Termination, Conformal Coated
517-0242
WESTERM D20 K4Z
D20K-TH-P-UU
D20K4Z HV (40-150VDC or D.20 Power), Compression
Termination
517-0242-CC
WESTERM D20 K4Z (Conformal
Coated)
D20K-TH-P-CU
D20K4Z HV (40-150VDC or D.20 Power), Compression
termination, Conformal Coated
517-0242 - ECC WESTERM D20 K4Z - Epoxy
Conformal Coat
D20K-TH-P-EU
D20K4Z HV (40-150VDC or D.20 Power), Compression
Termination, Epoxy Conformal Coated
517-0220
WESTERM D20KR Type 2
D20K-TL-D-UW
D20KR TYPE 2 LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), DB25
Termination with Wire-Wrap adapter option
517-0250
WESTERM D20 OKR
D20K-TL-D-UR
D20 OKR LV (20-60VDC or D.20 input), Compression
Termination, redundant D.20 and PS Input
D20K WESDAC modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart Description
Catalog Number Prefix
508-0101
WESDAC D20K Type 1 Version 1
D20K-DL-U-UU
508-0101-CC
WESDAC D20K Type 1 Version 1 (Conformal D20K-DL-U-CU
Coated)
WESDAC D20K LV, Conformal Coated
508-0102
WESDAC D20K HV
D20K-DH-U-UU
WESDAC D20K HV
508-0102-CC
WESDAC D20K HV (Conformal Coated)
D20K-DH-U-CU
WESDAC D20K HV, Conformal Coated
508-0102-ECC
WESDAC D20 KHV - Epoxy Conformal Coat D20K-DH-U-EU
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
WESDAC D20K LV
WESDAC D20K HV, Epoxy Conformal Coated
GE INFORMATION
201
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
DNP3K WESDAC modules
Legacy Part Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
508-0301
DNP I/O Module - Control
D20K-3L-U-UU
WESDAC D20K LV, DNP3 Communications
508-0301-CC
DNP I/O Module - Control
(Conformal Coated)
D20K-3L-U-CU
WESDAC D20K LV, DNP3 Communications,
Conformal Coated
508-0302
DNP I/O Module - Control HV
D20K-3H-U-UU
WESDAC D20K HV, DNP3 Communications
508-0302-CC
DNP I/O Module - Control HV
(Conformal Coated)
D20K-3H-U-CU
WESDAC D20K HV, DNP3 Communications,
Conformal Coated
D20S status modules, spare cross-reference
Use the online product configurator available on the GE Grid Solutions Online Store to see
the D20S module part numbers at:
http://store.gedigitalenergy.com/ViewProduct.aspx?Model=D20S%20Spare%20Parts
Legacy and new part numbers are listed for:
•
“D20S WESTERM modules” on page 202
•
“D20S WESDAC modules” on page 203
•
“DNP3S WESDAC modules” on page 203
•
“D20S RNET adapter pack” on page 204
D20S WESTERM modules
Legacy Part
Number
Description
517-0165
WESTERM D20S Type 1 Version 1 D20S-TL-P-U-S
D20S LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) Compression
Termination
517-0165-CC
WESTERM D20S Type 1 Version 1 D20S-TL-P-C-S)
- Conformal Coated
D20S LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) Compression
Termination, Conformal Coated
517-0165-ECC
WESTERM D20S Type 1 Version 1 D20S-TL-P-E-S
- Epoxy Conformal Coated
D20S LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) Compression
Termination, Epoxy Conformal Coated
517-0179
WESTERM D20 SD
D20S-TL-D-U-S
D20SD LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) DB25
Termination
517-0179-CC
WESTERM D20 SD - Conformal
Coated
D20S-TL-D-C-S
D20SD LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) DB25
Termination, Conformal Coated
517-0179-ECC
WESTERM D20 SD - Epoxy
Conformal Coated
D20S-TL-D-E-S
D20SD LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) DB25
Termination, Epoxy Conformal Coated
517-0219
WESTERM D20SX W/TB Plugs
D20S-TL-X-U-S
D20SX LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) Compression/
Disconnect Termination
517-0219-CC
WESTERM D20SX W/TB Plugs Conformal Coated
D20S-TL-X-C-S
D20SX LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) Compression/
Disconnect Termination Conformal Coated
517-0219-ECC
WESTERM D20SX W/TB Plugs Epoxy Conformal Coated
D20S-TL-X-E-S
D20SX LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) Compression/
Disconnect Termination Epoxy Conformal Coated
517-0327
WESTERM D20SB
D20S-TL-B-U-S
D20SB LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) Barrier
Termination
517-0327-CC
WESTERM D20SB - Conformal
Coated
D20S-TL-B-C-S
D20SB LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) Barrier
Termination, Conformal Coated
517-0327-ECC
WESTERM D20SB - Epoxy
Conformal Coated
D20S-TL-B-E-S
D20SB LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) Barrier
Termination, Epoxy Conformal Coated
517-0330
WESTERM D20 SDI, 24V
D20S-TL-D-U-I-024
D20SDI-24 LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) DB25
Termination
202
New Part Number - Smart Description
Catalog Number Prefix
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
Legacy Part
Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart Description
Catalog Number Prefix
517-0331
WESTERM D20 SDI, 48V
D20S-TL-D-U-I-048
D20SDI-48 LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) DB25
Termination
517-0262
WESTERM D20 SDI, 125V
D20S-TL-D-U-I-125
D20SDI-125 LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power) DB25
Termination
517-0252
WESTERM D20 OSD
D20S-TM-D-U-G-048
D20 OSD LV (20-60VDC or D.20 Power), DB25
Termination, Redundant D.20 and PS Input
517-0241
WESTERM D20 SZ 48V
D20S-TH-P-U-G-048
D20SZ HV (40-150 VDC Power) Compression
Termination
517-0241-CC
WESTERM D20 SZ 48V Conformal Coated
D20S-TH-P-C-G-048
D20SZ HV (40-150 VDC Power) Compression
Termination, Conformal Coated
517-0249
WESTERM D20 SZ 110V
D20S-TH-P-U-G-110
D20SZ HV (40-150 VDC Power) Compression
Termination
517-0249-ECC
WESTERM D20 SZ 110V - Epoxy
Conformal Coated
D20S-TH-P-E-G-110
D20SZ HV (40-150 VDC Power) Compression
Termination, Epoxy Conformal Coated
517-0266
WESTERM D20 SZ2 (110/220V)
D20S--THP-U-S
D20SZ HV (40-150 VDC Power) Compression
Termination
517-0366
WESTERM D20 SZ with Plugs(48V) D20S-TH-X-U-G-048
D20SZ HV (40-150 VDC Power) Compression/
Disconnect Termination
517-0377
WESTERM D20 SZ with Plugs
(24V)
D20SZ HV (40-150 VDC Power) Compression
Termination
D20S-TH-X-U-G-024
D20S WESDAC modules
Legacy Part Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
507-0101
WESDAC D20S Type 1 Version 1
D20S-DL-U-U-U
WESDAC D20S LV
507-0101-CC
WESDAC D20S Type 1 Version 1- D20S-DL-U-U-C
Conformal Coated
WESDAC D20S LV Conformal Coated
507-0103
WESDAC D20S HV2
D20S-DH-U-U-U
WESDAC D20S HV
507-0103-CC
WESDAC D20S HV2 - Conformal
Coated
D20S-DH-U-U-C
WESDAC D20S HV Conformal Coated
507-0103-ECC
WESDAC D20S HV2 - Epoxy
Conformal Coated
D20S-DH-U-U-E
WESDAC D20S HV Epoxy Conformal
Coated
DNP3S WESDAC modules
Legacy Part Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
507-0301
DNP I/O Module - Digital Input
D20S-3L-U-U-U
WESDAC D20S LV, DNP3 Communications
507-0301-CC
DNP I/O Module - Digital Input Conformal Coated
D20S-3L-U-U-C
WESDAC D20S LV, DNP3 Communications,
Conformal Coated
507-0303
DNP I/O Module - Digital Input HV D20S-3H-U-U-U
WESDAC D20S HV, DNP3 Communications
507-0303-CC
DNP I/O Module - Digital Input HV D20S-3H-U-U-C
- Conformal Coated
WESDAC D20S HV, DNP3 Communications,
Conformal Coated
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
203
APPENDIX F: D20 SPARE CROSS-REFERENCE
D20S RNET adapter pack
Legacy Part Number
Description
New Part Number - Smart
Catalog Number Prefix
Description
245-0009
12V Digital Input Adapter
D20S-U-U-U-U-U-012-U-U-U
12 V Digital Input Adapter - Set of 25
245-0030
24V Digital Input Adapter
D20S-U-U-U-U-U-024-U-U-U
24 V Digital Input Adapter - Set of 17
245-0029
24V Digital Input Adapter
D20S-U-U-U-U-U-024-U-U-U
24 V Digital Input Adapter - Set of 8
245-0004
48V Digital Input Adapter
D20S-U-U-U-U-U-048-U-U-U
48 V Digital Input Adapter - Set of 25
245-0012
110V Digital Input Adapter
D20S-U-U-U-U-U-110-U-U-U
110 V Digital Input Adapter - Set of 24
530-0133
125V Digital Input Adapter
D20S-U-U-U-U-U-125-U-U-U
125 V Digital Input Adapter - Set of 25
530-0133
220V Digital Input Adapter
D20S-U-U-U-U-U-220-U-U-U
220 V Digital Input Adapter - Set of 24
204
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Appendix G: Product Combinations
Product Combinations
The D20MX is available in three versions:
•
526-3001LF: D20MX CPU, 2 x 10/100/1000 Base TX Front Access ports (RJ45)
•
526-3003LF: D20MX CPU, 2 x 100 Base FX Front access ports (ST Connectors)
•
526-3005LF: D20MX CPU, 2 x 100 Base FX Rear Access ports (ST Connectors)
This appendix describes the compatibility of the D20MX (3 versions) with the D20 products.
Module compatibility
Only one D20MX processor module can be installed in a D20. Additional D20MX processor
modules are not required and are not compatible.
The D20MX does not require and is not compatible with D20ME Memory Expansion and
Media Interface Modules.
Use the following tables to check the compatibility of the components you want to
combine:
•
“D20 VME Chassis Compatibility” on page 206
•
“D20 Non-VME Chassis Compatibility” on page 206
•
“Modem Compatibility” on page 206
•
“D20A Analog Input Module Compatibility” on page 206
•
“D20S Status Input Module Compatibility” on page 207
•
“D20K Control Output Module Compatibility” on page 207
•
“D20C Combination Input/Output Module Compatibility” on page 207
•
“D20AC Input Module Compatibility” on page 207
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
205
APPENDIX G: PRODUCT COMBINATIONS
Table 82: D20 VME Chassis Compatibility
Component
GE Item #
Description
Compatible
Releases
Chassis
500-0280*
Chassis Assembly D20 M (VME 3U)
REL 16A or higher
Backplane
517-0123
WESTERM D20 M VME
REL 03 or higher
WESTERM
517-0225
WESTERM D20M+, Panel Mount
REL 09 or higher
517-0230
WESTERM D20 Assembly, Chassis Mount
All
580-2004
D20 Power Supply, 20-60VDC IN, 24V ISO Out
All
580-2005
D20 Power Supply, 20-60VDC In, 48V ISO Out
All
580-2006
D20 PS, 85-300VDC/85-264VAC In, 24V ISO Out
All
580-2007
D20 PS, 85-300VDC or 85-264VAC In, 48V ISO Out All
Power Supply
* 0V cable required from Westerm to Backplane
NOTE
Table 83: D20 Non-VME Chassis Compatibility
Component
GE Item #
Description
Compatible
Releases
Chassis
500-0305
Chassis, D20M+ Single Slot
REL 26 or higher
Westerm
517-0224
WESTERM D20M+, Single Slot
REL 15 or higher
Power Supply
580-2004
D20 Power Supply, 20 to 60VDC In, 24V ISO Out
All
580-2005
D20 Power Supply, 20 to 60VDC In, 48V ISO Out
All
580-2006
D20 Power Supply, 85 to 300VDC or 85 to 264VAC All
In, 24V ISO Out
580-2007
D20 Power Supply, 85 to 300VDC or 85 to 264VAC All
In, 48V ISO Out
Table 84: Modem Compatibility
Component
GE Item #
Description
Compatible Unit
BIN
520-0120
WESDAC D20 202/V.23 Modem
None
BIN
580-0771
Modem, Telenetics 14.4K DIALUP
All
Stand-alone
580-2062
WESTERMO IND Telemodem, TD-34 LV
Dial-up PASS
Table 85: D20A Analog Input Module Compatibility
206
Component
GE Item #
Description
Compatible
Releases
WESDAC
511-0101
WESDAC D20A Type 1 Version 1
REL 21 or higher
WESTERM
517-0163
WESTERM D20A Type 1 Version 1
All
517-0178
WESTERM D20 AD
All
2nd D.20 card
540-0207
WESDAC D20 ASK D.20 Interface
All
PCOMMON
306
PCOMMON v3.06
All
305
PCOMMON v3.05
All
301
PCOMMON v3.01
All
300
PCOMMON v3.00
All
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX G: PRODUCT COMBINATIONS
Table 86: D20S Status Input Module Compatibility
Component
GE Item #
Description
Compatible
Releases
WESDAC
507-0101
WESDAC D20S Type 1 Version 1
REL 18 or higher
WESTERM
517-0165
WESTERM D20S Type 1 Version 1
All
2nd D.20 card
540-0207
WESDAC D20 ASK D.20 Interface
All
PCOMMON
306
PCOMMON v3.06
All
305
PCOMMON v3.05
All
301
PCOMMON v3.01
All
300
PCOMMON v3.00
All
Table 87: D20K Control Output Module Compatibility
Component
GE Item #
Description
Compatible
Releases
WESDAC
508-0101
WESDAC D20K Type 1 Version 1
REL 17 or higher
WESTERM
2nd D.20 card
517-0164
WESTERM D20K Type 1 Version 1
All
540-0207
WESDAC D20 ASK D.20 Interface
All
PCOMMON
306
PCOMMON v3.06
All
305
PCOMMON v3.05
All
301
PCOMMON v3.01
All
300
PCOMMON v3.00
All
Table 88: D20C Combination Input/Output Module Compatibility
Component
GE Item #
Description
Compatible
Releases
WESDAC
504-0002
WESDAC D20C+
REL 20 or higher
WESTERM
517-0180
WESTERM D20 CD
All
2nd D.20 card
540-0209
WESDAC D20C D.20/WESMAINT Interface
All
PCOMMON
305
PCOMMON v3.05
All
300
PCOMMON v3.00
All
Table 89: D20AC Input Module Compatibility
Component
GE Item #
Description
Compatible
Releases
WESDAC
511-0106
WESDAC D20 AC 20 to 60V
All
WESTERM
517-0370
WESTERM D20 AC 3V/3I
All
2nd D.20 card
540-0207
WESDAC D20 ASK D.20 Interface
All
pBOOT
104
pBOOT 1.04
All
103
pBOOT 1.03
All
102
pBOOT 1.02
All
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
207
APPENDIX G: PRODUCT COMBINATIONS
208
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Appendix H: WESMAINT Error Log
Messages
WESMAINT Error Log Messages
This appendix describes all WESMAINT messages logged by the system that are not
described in any application Configuration Guide. This appendix includes error messages
for the Internet Protocol Stack (B100) and ROOT; where ROOT is the process that launches
D20MX applications.
Messages are displayed by the WESMAINT logger in the following format:
<P-NAME>: <MESSAGE>
where:
P-NAME is the process name as displayed by the SHELL.
MESSAGE is the actual message as described in the following tables.
For the Internet Protocol Stack, the process name is either B100 or ROOT.
For ROOT, this process name is ROOT.
Messages logged to the WESMAINT Error Log are classified in three categories:
•
Informational messages
•
Fatal error messages
•
Warnings
Use the following tables to find the cause and remedy for these messages:
•
Table 90, “Internet Protocol Stack error messages: cause and remedy”
•
Table 91, “ROOT error messages: cause and remedy”
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
209
APPENDIX H: WESMAINT ERROR LOG MESSAGES
Table 90: Internet Protocol Stack error messages: cause and remedy
Message
Cause
Remedy
Error Messages
E3: Unable to
create interface
table <x>
The Internet Protocol Stack was unable to
Contact GE Grid Solutions
create the Interface Current Table (B100CURR) Technical Support and report
in NVRAM. The table create attempt failed with this error.
a system error code of <x>.
E4: Memory alloc The application was unable to allocate <x>
failure <Size=<x>> bytes of RAM for the run-time structures
required.
Contact GE Grid Solutions
Technical Support and report
this error.
E18: Interface x
The Internet Protocol Stack needed to add
Contact GE Grid Solutions
cannot be added - interface “x” to the B100CURR table, but the
Technical Support and report
table full.
table was full. The table was designed to handle this error.
a maximum of eight interfaces.
E24: x route dst y
socket err <z>
The Internet Protocol Stack failed to perform
Contact GE Grid Solutions
the operation “x” (ADD or DEL) to the route
Technical Support and report
indicated by “y” due to a socket() function error this error.
<z>.
E25: x route dest y The Internet Protocol Stack failed to perform
Contact GE Grid Solutions
- send err <z>
the operation “x” (ADD or DEL) to the route
Technical Support and report
indicated by y due to a send() function error <z>. this error.
E30: x route dest y The Internet Protocol Stack failed to perform
Contact GE Grid Solutions
- mesg err <code>. the operation “x” (ADD or DEL) to the route
Technical Support and report
indicated by y due to error indicated by routing this error.
message response <z>.
E31: x route dest y The Internet Protocol Stack failed to perform
Change the IP address for the
- recv err <code> the operation “x” (ADD or DEL) to the route
Ethernet interface as
indicated by y due to a recv() function error <z>. indicated in the Cause
column.
Warning Messages
W11: Configured Table B100_IF has a configured interface type Contact GE Grid Solutions
interface <x> does which is not supported by any network
Technical Support and report
not exist
interface drivers present on this host, OR has a this error.
configured interface type which is supported,
but has a unit number which exceeds the
maximum number of units supported by the
network interface driver.
W12: Configured
interface <x> has
invalid name
Table B100_IF has a configured interface type
which is not 2 characters in length, or a unit
number which is outside the range of 1 to 99.
Contact GE Grid Solutions
Technical Support and report
this error.
Information Messages
210
I7: Device <x>:
IP=<y>
Netmask=<z>
The interface named <x> has been successfully N/A
assigned an IP address and netmask.
I8: BOOTP is not
supported
A configuration with BOOTP Client enabled was In the BOOTP Settings of the
downloaded to the D20MX.
D20 device properties, ensure
Not Used is checked.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX H: WESMAINT ERROR LOG MESSAGES
Table 91: ROOT error messages: cause and remedy
Message
Cause
Remedy
E301: Licensed
application <x>
NOT started Group:<y>
Licensed application is configured but not
started, because correct software license is
not available. Where <x> is application
name and <y> is Group ID
1) Disable the application in the
configuration.
2) Enable the trial period for the
group. See “Software (feature)
licensing” on page 105.
3) Purchase a license for the
group (Contact GE Grid Solutions
Technical Support for further
information)
E302a: <x>
Licensed
application was
NOT started
Applications are not started due to
licensing issues, where x is the number of
applications
E302 errors will be preceded by
one or more E301 errors. Once all
E301 errors have been resolved,
the E302 error will no longer occur.
Error Messages
E302b: System not System is not operating correctly because
operating correctly correct software license is not available.
Even applications that are not licensed
may fail to start.
Warning Messages
W1: Pri & Sec F/W There are different firmware versions in
differ. Type
primary and secondary storage locations
COMMIT or REVERT
in SHELL
W001: IP of <x>
same as CCUA
or
W001: IP of <x>
same as CCUB
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Type commit in the D20M Shell to
commit the firmware to secondary
storage. See “Committing new
firmware” on page 84.
Type revert in the D20M Shell to
recover the previous version of the
firmware. See “Reverting to old
firmware” on page 85.
When transferring a redundant D20 in a
Disable the standby IP addresses
ConfigPro or SGConfig project
or reassign them. See “IP
configuration to a D20MX the new D20MX addresses” on page 63.
standby IP addresses conflict with other
devices in the project, where <x> is the host
name of the device with a conflicting IP
address.
GE INFORMATION
211
APPENDIX H: WESMAINT ERROR LOG MESSAGES
212
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Appendix I: List of Acronyms
List of Acronyms
Acronym Definitions
This Appendix lists and defines the acronyms used in this manual.
Table 92: Acronym list
Acronym
Definition
A
Amperes, unit of measure
AEL
Accessible Emission Limit
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASDU
Application Service Data Units
AWG
American Wire Gauge, unit of measure
bps
bits per second, unit of measure
CCU
Central Control Unit
CE Mark
Mandatory conformity mark for products placed on the market in the
European Economic Area (EEA)
CISPR
Special international committee on radio interference
COM1/COM2
Communications port
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CTS
Clear To Send
dBm
decibel-milliwatt, unit of measure - an electrical power unit in decibel (dB)
DCA
Data Collection Application
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DNP
Distributed Network Protocol
DoC
Declaration of Conformity: States which CE mark directive(s) has been met and
includes a signature of a company official indicating the company's
responsibility for its CE mark compliance claim.
DPA
Data Processing Application
DST
Daylight Saving Time
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
213
APPENDIX I: LIST OF ACRONYMS
214
Acronym
Definition
DTA
Data Transmission Application
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
EMC
Electromagnetic Capability
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
EPLD
Erasable Programmable Logic Device
EPUP
Environmental Protection Use Period
ESD
ElectroStatic Discharge
EU
European Union
FEFI
Far End Fault
FPGA
Field-Programmable Gate Array
GE
General Electric
GFO
Glass Fiber Optic
GOF
glass optical fiber
HCS
Hard Clad Silica
HDLC
High-level Data Link Control
HMI
Human Machine Interface (also called Graphical User Interface – GUI)
HSP
Hardware Support Package
Hz
Hertz, unit of measure for frequency
I/O
Input/Output
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission Standards
IED
Intelligent Electronic Device
ILS
Instrument Landing System
in-lb
inch-pound, unit of measure for energy
IRIG-B
Inter Range Instrumentation Group (IRIG) - an American standardized network
time code format
kbps
kilo bits per second, unit of measure
LAN
Local Area Network
lb
pound, unit of measure for weight
LC
Lucent connector; A type of fiber-optic cable connector
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LLA
Loss Link Alert
LRU
Logical Remote Unit
LV
Low Voltage
LVD
Low Voltage Directives (CE Mark)
Mb
Mega bits, unit of measure
MB
Mega bytes, unit of measure
Mbps
Mega bits per second, unit of measure
MBps
Mega bytes per second, unit of measure
MCV
Maximum Concentration Values
MD5
Message Digest 5 (check data integrity)
MDI
Medium Dependent Interface
MDIX
Medium Dependent Interface, Crossover
ms
milliseconds, unit of measure
Nm
Newton-meter, measure of energy
NTP
Network Time Protocol
NVRAM
Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
APPENDIX I: LIST OF ACRONYMS
Acronym
Definition
PC
Personal Computer
PCBA
Printed Circuit Board Assembly
PFO
Plastic Fiber Optic
PG&E
Pacific Gas and Electric
PID
Proportional, Integral and Derivative
PIM
Privileged Identity Management
PPM
Parts Per Million
pSOS
Type of operating system
RMA
Return Merchandise Authorization
RoHS
Restriction of Hazardous Substances
RTC
Real Time Clock
RTS
Request To Send
RTU
Remote Terminal Unit
RU
Rack Unit
Rx
Receive
RXD
Receive Data
SA COM
Serial Analyze Communications
SCADA
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SCP
Secure Copy application
SEL
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SOE
Sequence Of Events
SQL™
Structured Query Language
SRU
Sub-Remote Unit
ST
Straight Tip connector; A type of fiber-optic cable connector
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
TIA
Telecommunication Industries Association
Tx
Transmit
TXD
Transmit Data
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
UPC
Universal Protocol Converter
UTC
Universal Time Coordination
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair
VA
Volt Amps, unit of measure
V AC
Volts, Alternating Current, unit of measure
V DC
Volts, Direct Current, unit of measure
VME
Versa Module Eurocard
WinSCP
Windows Secure CoPy
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
215
APPENDIX I: LIST OF ACRONYMS
216
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Appendix J: Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
This appendix provides the warranty and revision history.
Warranty
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE Grid Solutions warrants most of its GE
manufactured products for 10 years. For warranty details including any limitations and
disclaimers, see the GE Grid Solutions Terms and Conditions at
https://www.gegridsoluctions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.
Revision history
Version
1.00
Revision Date
Change Description
0
Oct. 17, 2012
Original release of this document.
1
Nov. 6, 2012
Updated D20 applications table and added Firmware/FPGA versions table.
2
Nov. 23, 2012
Added sections for: Update to the SAN0001 firmware option, Transfer D20/
D200 configurations to the D20MX, and Updating D20/D200
Configurations to use the D20MX firmware definition with ConfigPro.
Added an Appendix for Resetting a read/write user password.
3
Jan. 11, 2013
Updated procedures for configuring redundant D20MX devices in the
Software Configuration chapter.
1.10
0
March 1, 2013
Updated the D20MX applications table.
Added Migrate D20MX application definitions to SGConfig section.
1.20
0
July 15, 2013
Updated the D20MX application tables, order code table, upgrade kit order
code table, procedures in Chapter 5, and Added Appendix D.
1.21
0
Sep. 13, 2013
Updated for firmware version 1.21.
1.30
0
Jan. 7, 2013
Renamed to the D20MX Instruction manual.
Added Chapter 8: Removing Configuration Data and Sensitive Information
from the D20MX.
Added Appendix E: Secure Connection for LogicLinx.
Updated for firmware version 1.30.
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
217
APPENDIX J: MISCELLANEOUS
Version
Revision Date
1.31
0
March 13, 2014 Updated for firmware version 1.31.
1.32
0
May 7, 2014
1
May 16, 2014
Updated for firmware version 1.32 revision 1.
0
July 10, 2014
Updated for firmware version 1.33 revision 0.
1.3x
1.4x
1.5x
218
Change Description
Updated for firmware version 1.32.
0
Sep. 2, 2014
Updated for firmware version 1.40 revision 0.
1
Sep. 11, 2014
Changed Note in Twisted Pair Ethernet connection for STP.
2
Feb. 27, 2015
Added content to the Grounding the D20MX section regarding potential
electrical surge or ESD damage.
Added content to the RS-232 section regarding use of both the front and
rear RS-232 ports.
Updated Appendix: Default Role-based Access Control Module for Read
Access tables > Not Used bits for some applications.
0
July 6, 2015
Updated for firmware version 1.5x revision 0.
Added serial expansion.
1
Nov. 12, 2015
Corrected Redundancy Wiring - Single RS-232 Switch Panel figure
(TB2 - 1/2 labels)
2
Jan. 4, 2016
Updated branding for GE Grid Solutions and added Achilles Level 1
certification.
Revised WESTERM D20M+ termination panel section.
3
Jan 11, 2016
Added Serial Ports section to Before You Start chapter.
Changed content of Table 5, D20 Chassis Types in Before You Start chapter.
4
Jan 29, 2016
Corrected Appendix: FAQs.
Added content to Appendix: Spare Cross Reference.
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
D20MX Substation Controller
Index
transfer D20/D200 ................................................................................93
A
CONFIGURE
ACCESS, TECHNICAL SUPPORT SHELL .......................................... 78
AUTOMATIC ON-LINE STARTUP TEST ............................................ 73
AUTOMATION APPLICATIONS ............................................................ 19
CONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY ........................................................53
serial expansion cards ..................................................................... 107
D
C
D.20 LINK
CABLING
D.20 Link .................................................................................................... 57
Ethernet ..................................................................................................... 60
fiber optic ................................................................................................. 61
overview .................................................................................................... 55
serial ........................................................................................................... 57
CATALOG NUMBERS ............................................................................ 193
CHANGE LOG ........................................................................................... 217
CHASSIS OVERVIEW
D20 non-VME .......................................................................................... 23
D20 VME .................................................................................................... 25
CODE FILES .................................................................................................. 74
COMMIT NEW FIRMWARE ................................................................... 84
COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS ............................................ 36
COMPLIANCE STANDARDS AND PROTECTION ...................... 143
CONFIGPRO
download a D20MX configurations .......................................... 165
transfer D20 configurations ......................................................... 152
CONFIGPRO, SECURE CONNECTION ........................................... 184
peripherals ...............................................................................................59
D.20 LINK CABLING .................................................................................57
D20
chassis layouts ............................................................................... 41, 52
modems .....................................................................................................27
Non-VME chassis overview ..............................................................23
power supplies .......................................................................................26
system redundancy .............................................................................66
VME chassis overview .........................................................................25
D20MX
connect the power supply ................................................................53
grounding .................................................................................................54
logging .................................................................................................... 129
processor ..................................................................................................18
removal steps ...................................................................................... 114
unpacking .................................................................................................52
DEFAULT USER ...........................................................................................79
DESIGN OF PRODUCT .............................................................................17
DOCUMENTATION
additional ..................................................................................................11
audience ....................................................................................................11
conventions .............................................................................................12
CONFIGURATION
logiclinx ................................................................................................... 186
logiclinx editor ..................................................................................... 191
PuTTY ....................................................................................................... 187
westmaint user ................................................................................... 184
DOWNLOAD
image files over network ...................................................................82
software over serial .............................................................................80
when ...........................................................................................................79
CONFIGURATION DATA
generate system default configuration .................................. 117
removal from D20MX ....................................................................... 119
removal from PC ................................................................................ 121
CONFIGURATION FILES ......................................................................... 74
E
CONFIGURATIONS
ELECTRIC SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................36
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
219
INDEX
EMULATION, TERMINAL ........................................................................72
ENVIRONMENT SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................37
ERROR LOG
LOCAL USER ACCOUNTS ......................................................................78
LOGICLINX
Configuration .......................................................................................186
Editor configuration ..........................................................................191
Kernel ...................................................................................................... 129
WESMAINT ............................................................................................. 129
ERROR LOG MESSAGES ...................................................................... 209
ETHERNET
cabling .......................................................................................................60
fiber optic ..................................................................................................61
twisted-pair .............................................................................................60
F
FAIL-OVER CHECK ....................................................................................75
FIBER OPTIC
cabling .......................................................................................................61
port LEDs ................................................................................................ 110
M
MANUAL - HOW TO USE .......................................................................12
MATERIALS - REQUIRED ................................................................ 39, 43
MODEMS ........................................................................................................27
O
OPERATIONAL LEDS .............................................................................109
OVERVIEW
cabling ........................................................................................................55
D20MX processor ..................................................................................18
product .......................................................................................................17
FILES
code ............................................................................................................74
configuration ..........................................................................................74
FIRMWARE
commit new ............................................................................................84
revert old ...................................................................................................85
upgrade .....................................................................................................10
FIRMWARE/FPGA VERSIONS ..............................................................23
FRONT PANEL LEDS ............................................................................. 109
G
GROUNDING D20MX ..............................................................................54
GUARANTEE .............................................................................................. 217
P
PERIODIC INSPECTION ........................................................................113
PERIPHERALS ..............................................................................................59
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................37
PORT - RS-232 ............................................................................................65
PORTS ..............................................................................................................28
POWER SUPPLIES .....................................................................................26
POWER-UP ...................................................................................................73
test requirements ..................................................................................71
test steps ...................................................................................................72
PRECAUTIONS
safety ..........................................................................................................15
warning symbols ...................................................................................16
I
IMAGE DOWNLOAD PREREQUISITES .............................................80
IMAGE FILES, DOWNLOAD OVER NETWORK .............................82
INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE ........................................................77
IP ADDRESSES ............................................................................................63
K
KERNEL ERROR LOG ............................................................................. 129
KITS, UPGRADE ..........................................................................................35
PREREQUISITES
generate system default configuration ...................................117
image download ....................................................................................80
remove configuration data ...........................................................119
PRODUCT
design .........................................................................................................17
overview ....................................................................................................17
return ..........................................................................................................10
PUTTY CONFIGURATION ....................................................................187
R
RECOMMENDATIONS
L
LAN
port LEDs ................................................................................................ 110
Redundancy ............................................................................................62
LEDS
fiber optic port status ...................................................................... 110
front panel ............................................................................................. 109
LAN port status ................................................................................... 110
operational status ............................................................................. 109
LICENSING SOFTWARE ....................................................................... 105
220
GE INFORMATION
storage .......................................................................................................38
storage conditions ................................................................................38
RECOVERY MODE USER ACCOUNT .................................................79
REDUNDANCY
LAN ...............................................................................................................62
system ........................................................................................................66
system - test ............................................................................................74
REMOTE USER ACCOUNTS ...................................................................78
REMOVAL - D20MX ...............................................................................114
REMOVE CONFIGURATION DATA
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
INDEX
from D20MX ......................................................................................... 119
from PC ................................................................................................... 121
REPAIR ......................................................................................................... 217
REQUIRED
materials ............................................................................................39, 43
tools ......................................................................................................39, 43
REQUIREMENTS - TESTING .................................................................. 71
RETURN PRODUCT ................................................................................... 10
REVERT OLD FIRMWARE ....................................................................... 85
REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................... 217
RS-232 PORT ............................................................................................... 65
S
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................... 15
SECURE CONNECTION
ConfigPro ............................................................................................... 184
SGConfig ................................................................................................ 183
SECURITY ...................................................................................................... 18
contact ......................................................................................................... 9
GE Grid Solutions web site .................................................................. 9
library ............................................................................................................ 9
TECHNICAL SUPPORT SHELL ACCESS ...........................................78
TERA TERM SET UP ...................................................................................80
TERMINAL
emulation ..................................................................................................72
emulator ....................................................................................................80
WESMAINT II+ .................................................................................. 72, 73
TERMINATION PANEL .............................................................................30
TEST
automatic on-line startup .................................................................73
fail-over ......................................................................................................75
requirements ...........................................................................................71
switch-over ..............................................................................................75
system redundancy .............................................................................74
TOOLS - REQUIRED .......................................................................... 39, 43
TRANSFER D20/D200 CONFIGURATIONS ...................................93
TWISTED-PAIR ............................................................................................60
SERIAL
cabling ....................................................................................................... 57
expansion card configuration ..................................................... 107
SERIAL PORTS ............................................................................................. 28
SGCONFIG, SECURE CONNECTION .............................................. 183
SHELL .............................................................................................................. 72
SMART CATALOG NUMBERS ........................................................... 193
SOFTWARE
applications ............................................................................................. 19
download over serial .......................................................................... 80
introduction ............................................................................................. 77
licensing ................................................................................................. 105
prerequisites ........................................................................................... 80
specifications .......................................................................................... 37
Tera Term set up ................................................................................... 80
when to download ............................................................................... 79
U
UNPACKING THE D20MX ......................................................................52
UPDATE D20 CONFIGURATION TO USE D20MX FW (CONFIGPRO) ..................................................................................................... 100
UPDATE D200 CONFIGURATION TO USE D20MX FW (CONFIGPRO) ............................................................................................. 104
UPGRADE
firmware ....................................................................................................10
kits ................................................................................................................35
USER ACCOUNTS
local .............................................................................................................78
recovery .....................................................................................................79
remote ........................................................................................................78
SPECIFICATIONS
communications ................................................................................... 36
electric ....................................................................................................... 36
environment ............................................................................................ 37
physical ..................................................................................................... 37
software .................................................................................................... 37
STANDARDS AND PROTECTION COMPLIANCE ...................... 143
STORAGE
conditions ................................................................................................. 38
recommendations ................................................................................ 38
SUPPORT
contact ..........................................................................................................9
llbrary ............................................................................................................9
SWITCH-OVER
check .......................................................................................................... 75
verify hardware or software ............................................................ 76
SYSTEM
V
VERSIONS
firmware ....................................................................................................23
FPGA ............................................................................................................23
W
WARNING SYMBOLS ...............................................................................16
WARRANTY ................................................................................................ 217
WESMAINT
error log .................................................................................................. 129
error log messages ........................................................................... 209
II+ .......................................................................................................... 72, 73
user configuration ............................................................................. 184
WESTERM D20+ TERMINATION PANEL .........................................30
redundancy ............................................................................................. 66
T
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE INFORMATION
221
INDEX
222
GE INFORMATION
D20MX SUBSTATION CONTROLLER INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising